Home

Installation

1. 40 Panel REF1 P1101 Panel REF 24 REF1 P1106 E 0 17 REF2 0 PT Panel REF2 ne PID Setpoint abe ka o Al P4016 G40 Current 4 PID1 Torque Power C Al P4017 P4014 P4015 F ei 2 PID Act Value orque Power Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102 DI dh poal ny P1105 Al Speed Comm REF 1 EXT 2 Panel REF 2 4 al P1106 G12 Const Al Speed Comm REF 2 P1106 Panel REF2 p4910 PID Setpoint 70 17 P1107 sa P4012 Al2 P4013 19 P1108 Comm Internal 4 G40 Al P4016 PID4 Current 4 PID1 Out Torque Power P4014 P4015 Curran P401 7 PID Act Value Torque Power PANEL Hand Auto Selection HAND AUTO Note In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to value 19 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 113 PID Controller Advanced ACS510 has 2 separate PID Controllers Process PID PID1 and External PID PID2 Process PID PID1 has 2 separate sets of parameters Process PID PID1 SET1 defined in Group 40 and Process PID PID1 SET2 defined in Group 41 You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027 Typically two different PID Controller sets are used when the load of the motor changes considerably from one situation to another You can use External PID PID2 defined in Group 42 in 2 di
2. ABB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value commanded Comments State 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE CONTROL A 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 RAMP OUT 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force Fieldbus Adapter 186 ACS510 User s Manual A
3. H Relay Logic ACS510 ACS510 dl NT magaya kan E 1 M y Standard PFC mode PFC with Autochange mode The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step low frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary motor Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 133 Code Description The table below shows the ACS510 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is disabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 Parameter Setting ACS510 Relay Assignment 1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange Disabled 4141 414141 4 1 Rot RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 0 0 01 1 1 1 1828 E33 EON MINEA 77 31 XIXIXI X X 1 Aux X X X X X 31 31 XIX X X 2 Aux Aux X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux Aux Aux X X X X 3131 X X X 2IX Aux Aux X X X 31 31 31 31 31 31 6 Aux Aux Aux Aux Aux Aux 31131 XIX X X 1 Aux Aux X X X X One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use One motor is in sleep when the other is rotating The table below shows the ACS510 PFC motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output parame
4. 20000000 228 Index ACS510 User s Manual control panel 220000000e 27 cable requirements 229 comm error fault parameter 100 contrast 28 display bar graph 000 108 display contrast aa 28 display decimal point form parameters 108 display max parameters 108 display min parameters 108 display process variables parameter group 108 display selection parameters 108 display units parameters 108 parameter lock parameter 84 pass code parameter 84 reference control parameter 73 signal max parameters 108 signal min parameters 108 SOM KEYS sehe gue c PX EE IER 28 control panel Assistant 27 changed parameters mode 32 controls overview nasran 28 fault logger mode 32 I O settings mode 34 main menu eee 30 output mode 0 28 parameter backup mode 32 parameters mode annann 30 rotating arrow isses eese 29 SofUkey zi doni mla logre 28 control panel Basic alarm codes 2 200000 204 controls overview a nrnna 36 output mode 0 36 parameter backup mode 39 parameters mode 38 control word ABB drive
5. Start Up 106 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 107 Group 33 Information This group provides access to information about the drive s current programs versions and test date Code Description 3301 FW VERSION Contains the version of the drive s firmware 3302 LP VERSION Contains the version of the loading package 3303 TEST DATE Contains the test date yy ww 3304 DRIVE RATING Indicates the drive s current and voltage rating The format is XXXY where XXX The nominal current rating of the drive in amps If present an A indicates a decimal point in the rating for the current For example XXX 9A4 indicates a nominal current rating of 9 4Amps Y The voltage rating of the drive where Y 4 indicates a 380 480 Volt rating Start Up 108 ACS510 User s Manual Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables This group defines the content for control panel display middle area when the control panel is in the output mode Code Description 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM P 3404 P3405 Selects the first parameter b
6. 140 ramp zero select parameter 95 time parameter 0 00 00 eee 94 default macro 200 cece eee 42 default values listing for macros 0 eee eee 50 listing for parameters 51 derating adjustment example 212 altit de AA 212 switching frequency 000 212 temperature a 212 derivation time PID parameter 114 device overtemperature fault code 196 diagnostics x cadet eee ee Vad ADA LG AG aa 195 EFBcomm 2200000 e0 ee 151 FBA COMM o Pals tne edt ade NG 182 differences list downloads 34 digital cable requirements lllllllslssn 229 digital input at fault history parameters 70 connections eee 17 specifications 2 000 17 status data parameter 65 digital output connections eee 17 specifications 228 dimensions drive mounting 231 drive outside 2 0 0000s 232 direction CONT a ews dE Ed 30 control parameter 000 72 display format PID parameter 114 disposal kada balana etre pee tei 235 download fail rea 2 xcu oisi seb eod ea d quies 34 handling inexact transfers 33 40 parameter sets 220000005 32 Index 240 drive EFB comm installation
7. 143 FBA module installation 177 id faultcode 000 eee 198 MOUNTING uuo s emu dieser naina 12 mounting dimensions 231 outside dimensions 232 rating parameter AA 107 temperature data parameter 65 Weight eet nne pan NAK NANG 233 drive on time data parameters 67 E earth fault fault code 2020002 eee eee 198 parameter cee eaee 102 earthing see ground EFB baud rate parameter 124 config file faultcode 198 control profile parameter 124 CRC errors count parameter 124 fault codes zz ous neo gant dala EOUPS 198 ok messages count parameter 124 parameters eee 124 125 parity parameter 124 protocol id parameter 124 protocol parameter group 124 station id parameter 124 status parameter 124 UART errors count parameter 124 efficiency e Los scole AE S mE x 229 EM3 Screw s l les ru RR RR E 216 embedded field bus see EFB EMC CE marking 00 020 eee eee 236 motor cable requirements 220 emergency deceleration time parameter 94 stop devices aaaea 214 stop select parameter 93 EN 61800 3 first environment restricted distribution radiation limits
8. 8109 1 Hz f Hz 4 P8115 m Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit fax 8109 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D P 8109 1 After the first auxiliary motor starts P 8109 Output frequency decreases by the value 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 P81124 In effect the output of the speed regulated motor drops to compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor fain See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 e B Output frequency increase during the start delay C A e C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency 1 increases 1 On Note 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between e 8112 Low FREQ 1 e 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 1 8110 START FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor starts if e One auxiliary motor is running e ACS510 output frequency exceeds the limit 8110 1 Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8110 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 131 Code Description 8111 START FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to start the third to the sixth auxiliary motor See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor starts if Two auxiliary motor
9. Diagnostics 200 ACS510 User s Manual Fault Fault Name In Description and Recommended Corrective Action Code Panel 1003 PAR Al SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1301 AI 1 MIN gt 1302 Al 1 MAX 1304 AI 2 MIN gt 1305 AI 2 MAX 1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 1504 AO 1 MIN gt 1505 AO 1 MAX e 1510 AO 2 MIN gt 1511 AO 2 MAX 1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal kVA or motor nominal power Check for the following e 1 1 lt 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 1 73 Py lt 3 0 Where Py 1000 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are kW or Py 746 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER if units are HP e g in US 1006 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following EXTROMISSING Extension relay module not connected and 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4 6 have non zero values 1007 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent Check for and correct FBUSMISSING A parameter is set for fieldbus control e g 1001 ExT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM but 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 1008 REVERSED 1009 PAR PCU Parameter values for power control are inconsistent Improper motor nominal frequency or speed Check for both of the following e 18 60 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED lt 16 0 8 s 9908 MOTOR NOM
10. Start Up 42 ACS510 User s Manual Application Macro ABB Standard Default This macro provides a general purpose 2 wire I O configuration with three 3 constant speeds This is the default macro Parameter values are the default values defined in the Complete Parameter List for ACS510 on page 51 Connection example X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen L y2 AI1 External frequency reference 1 0 10 V Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA T79 AGND Analog output circuit common 40124 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 411 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 112 IDCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Activate to start L 414 DI2 Fwd Rev Activate to reverse rotation direction 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activate to select 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable ee 1 mae TET 20 RO1A _ Default operation Bi el al f27 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 DI3 DI4 Output 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 0 D Reference through AT1
11. 100 loss fault codes 197 maximum parameters 78 minimum parameters 78 parameter group 2 2200000 78 ref correction formula 74 analog output content max parameters 82 content min parameters 82 current max parameters 82 current min parameters 82 data content parameters 82 data parameter 0 66 filter parameters 82 parameter group aaa 82 application block output data parameter 65 application macro parameter 63 application macros see macros Assistant control panel see control panel Assistant autochange interval parameter 133 level parameter 134 OVErvieW llle 134 starting order counter 134 automatic reset see reset automatic auxiliary motor see motor auxiliary B backing up parameters Assistant panel 32 backing up parameters Basic panel 39 braking components sees 224 protection from overheated resistor 227 resistor heat dissipation 226 selecting brake choppers resistors 224 WINING o us activa Gales CEWG due X e eG 226 break point frequency fault parameter 101 C cable requirements grounding ee eaa E M 215 input power
12. ACS510 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes Control Bits Coils Oxxxx 01 Read Coil Status Relay Outputs 05 Force Single Coil 15 Force Multiple Coils Status Bits Discrete Inputs 1xxxx 02 Read Input Status Discrete Inputs Analog Inputs Input Registers 3xxxxx 04 Read Input Registers Parameters Holding Registers 4xxxx 03 Read 4X Registers Control Status Words 06 Preset Single 4X Register References 16 Preset Multiple 4X Registers 23 Read Write 4X Registers Communication Profiles When communicating by Modbus the ACS510 supports multiple profiles for control and status information Parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE selects the profile used ABB DRV LIM The primary and default profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile This implementation of the ABB Drives profile standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives The ABB Drives profile is based on the PROFIBUS interface and is discussed in detail in the following sections DCU PROFILE The DCU PROFILE profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment ABB DRV FULL ABB DRV FULL is the implementation of the ABB Drives profile that standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives This implementation supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM impleme
13. Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 4010 SET POINT SEL 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 40003 Set 1 9 COMM Alt AI 4110 SET POINT SEL 10 COMM AI1 Set 2 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s action if serial communication is lost Drive Parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC O NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive response 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Embedded Fieldbus 150 ACS510 User s Manual Feedback from the Drive EFB Pre defined Feedback Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see input word point object listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 154 m Modbus Protocol Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0102 SPEED 40102 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103 0104 CURRENT 40104 0105 TORQUE 40105 0106 POWER 40106 0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 40301 bit 0 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV
14. Parlock The remedy is to unlock the parameter set parameter 1602 ncompat drive model The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of the same type ACS industrial or ACH HVAC and the same model all ACS510 Toomany differences The remedy is to manually define a new set or upload the set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive 1 0 Settings Mode Use the I O Setting mode to check and edit the setting at any I O terminal 1 Select I O SETTINGS in the Main Menu Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 2 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired I O group for example digital inputs 3 Press ENTER 4 Press UP DOWN to step to a particular item for example DI1 After a brief pause the displays shows the current setting for the selection 5 Press EDIT 6 Press UP DOWN to select a new setting 7 Press SAVE to save 35 Start Up 36 ACS510 User s Manual Basic Control Panel Features The Basic Control Panel features Numeric control panel with a LCD display Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time Copy function Parameters can be copied to the Control Panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Controls Display Overview The following table summarizes the button functions and displays on the Basic Control Panel LCD DISPLAY Divided into five areas Upper left Identifies control location local
15. 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM Selects the second parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3402 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter See parameter 3403 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter See parameter 3404 3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT Selects the units used with the second display parameter See parameter 3405 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3406 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter See parameter 3407 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM Selects the third parameter by number displayed on the control panel See parameter 3401 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3402 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter See parameter 3403 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter See parameter 3404 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT Selects the units used with the third display parameter See parameter 3405 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter
16. Braking unit or Chopper and resistor Wheninstalling control wiring refer to the following as appropriate Control Terminals Table on page 17 Control Connections on page 228 Application Macros on page 41 Complete Parameter Descriptions on page 63 Embedded Fieldbus on page 142 Fieldbus Adapter on page 174 Installation ACS510 User s Manual 15 Power Connection Diagrams The following diagram shows the terminal layout for frame size R3 which in general applies to frame sizes R1 R6 except for the R5 R6 power and ground terminals Diagram shows the R3 frame YT DIP Switehestor Analog Inputs Other frames have similar layouts J1 2 P Alt in Voltage Position m a S p gt A2 in Current Position j X1 Analog Inputs and Outputs and 10 V Ref Voltage Output Power LED Green Fault LED Red X1 Digital Inputs and 24 V Aux Voltage Output X1 Relay Outputs J2 DIP Switch i Optional Module 1 for RS485 Termination i J2 J2 i X1 Communications pe A RS485 A ON ON i Optional Module 2 off position on position Power Input ji Power Output to Motor Frame Sizes U1 V1 W1 I U2 V2 W2 R5 R6 differ See EM3 next page EM1 GND X0003 Optional braking Frame Terminal Size Labels R1 R2 BRK BRK Brake resistor R3 R4 UDC UDC e Braking u
17. When set 2 is selected parameters 4101 4126 are used 0 SET 1 PID Set 1 parameters 4001 4026 is active 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 above 7 SET 2 PID Set 2 parameters 4101 4126 is active 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input D11 as the control for PID Set selection Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1 De activating the digital input selects PID Set 2 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for PID Set selection See DI1 INV above Start Up 120 ACS510 User s Manual Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Parameters of this group belong to PID parameter set 2 The operation of parameters 4101 4126 is analogous with set 1 parameters 4001 4026 PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Group 41 Process PID Set 2 Code Description 4101 See 4001 4026 4126 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 121 Group 42 External Trimming PID This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller PID2 which is used for the External Trimming PID The operation of parameters 4201 4221 is analogous with Pro
18. llle 91 motor resolution 5 219 motor specification 219 switching parameter 98 Index ACS510 User s Manual fuses 380 480 volt drives 214 G gain PID parameter 05 113 generic profile actual value mapping 194 actual value scaling 194 OVervieW 02000 eee eee 193 reference scaling 193 technical data 0 193 gland klt o2 duetoe e Phe pb SPORE LR OPEP 13 ground cable wire requirements 215 fault protection 219 H hand auto macro lesen 46 heatoSs 522 52 De phe ue be NP Oe wert dus 229 l I O settings Assistant panel 34 IEC ratings see ratings impedance grounded network see floating network information parameter group 00005 107 input power cable wire requirements 214 disconnect device 213 specifications 0 213 input power connection floating networks lugs for RE 217 terminal size 2200005 217 totque sect and paaa pP SEU gees 217 installation checklist tanai sayng Aa Meade wah kna 23 compatibility 00 00 e eee ee 9 environment llle 10 flow chart 7 location cech BAN baa bina En NG 10 mounting drive eee eee 12 preparation eee eee 8 p
19. 1203 1208 CONST SPEED 2 CONST SPEED 7 Each sets a value for a Constant Speed See CONST SPEED 1 above Start Up 78 ACS510 User s Manual Group 13 Analog Inputs This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs Code Description 1301 MINIMUM A11 Defines the minimum value of the analog input e Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range See example below The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM Al These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference See figure at parameter 1104 Example To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA Configure the analog input for 0 20 mA current signal Calculate the minimum 4 mA as a percent of full range 20 mA 4 mA 20 mA 100 20 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX See figure at parameter 1104 1303 FILTER AI w Unfiltered signal Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 A11 The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time 100 pa specified EE Filtered signal t L Time constant 1304 1305 MINIMUM AI
20. Description 2109 EM STOP SEL Defines control of the Emergency stop command When activated Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart 0 NOT SEL Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command De activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command De activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command 2 6 DIZ INV DIG INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command See DI1 INV above 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION Start Up 94 ACS510 User s Manual Group 22 Accel Decel This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration You define these ramps as a pair one for acceleration and one for deceleration You can define two pa
21. Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual Serial Communication Configuration 145 Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined below In particular note that the station Id may require adjustment Code Description Protocol Reference Modbus 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Do not edit Any non zero value entered for parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL sets this parameter automatically The format is XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link Set each drive on the network with a unique value for this parameter When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 Note For a new address to take affect the drive power must be cycled or 5302 must first be set to 0 before selecting a new address Leaving 5302 0 places the RS485 channel in reset disabling communication 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 9 6 Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data
22. 0407 CURRENT AT FLT 0 1A 0 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 53 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0408 TORQUE AT FLT 0 196 0 0409 STATUS AT FLT 1 0 0410 Di 1 3 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0411 Di 4 6 AT FLT 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 as Par 0401 1 0 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 as Par 0401 1 0 Group 10 Start Stop Dir 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 14 1 2 Y N688 1 N689 1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 14 1 0 Y 1003 DIRECTION 1 3 1 3 Y NOTE Group 11 Reference Select 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1 2 1 1 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 6 12 1 0 Y 1103 REF1 SELECT 0 17 1 1 Y 1104 REF1 MIN 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 1105 REF1 MAX 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 55 0 Hz 1106 REF2 SELECT 0 19 1 2 Y 1107 REF2 MIN 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1108 REF2 MAX 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 Group 12 Constant Speeds 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 14 19 1 9 Y 1202 CONST SPEED 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 5 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 5 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 5 5Hz 1203 CONST SPEED 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 10 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 10 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 11 0 Hz 1204 CONST SPEED 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 15 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 15 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0
23. 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal e See DI1 INV above Drive Started START STOP COMMAND Par Group 10 START ENABLE SIGNAL Params 1608 amp 1609 Rel Relay Energized Clay STARTED De energized RELAY STATUS Par Group 14 Damper Open j l l l Damper Damper Closed Closed DAMPER ag AA lt gt STATUS Damper Damper Opening Closing Time Time RUN ENABLE SIGNAL from the damper end switch when the damper is fully opened Parameter 1601 MOTOR STATUS Acceleration Deceleration Time Time Par 2202 Par 2203 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 87 Code Description 1609 START ENABLE 2 Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 2 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on panel display The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2
24. 20 RO1A n Default operation 25 RO3C 21 RO1B H Running gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A f Default operation 24 RO2B Fault 1 2222 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 26 RO3A Relay output 3 programmable Default operation Input signals Analog ref and actual Al1 2 Start stop manual PFC DI1 6 Runenable DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection DI3 Interlock D14 5 s 27 RO3B Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Output signals Jumper Setting Analog output AO1 Frequency Analog output AO2 Actual 1 J1 Relay output 1 Running Q Al1 0 10V Relay output 2 Fault 1 9 p gt AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 3 Aux motor ON Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 49 Application Macro SPFC This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications with cycle soft start function To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 15 SPFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example X 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 Al1 External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 vi oo 3 AGND Analog input circuit comm
25. 221 unrestricted distribution radiation limits 222 enclosure YDES AA EC UYR 233 enclosure protection class code 9 environment first definition 5 236 second definition 236 error value inversion PID parameter 114 exception codes EFB modbus 161 external comm module parameter group 123 external commands selection parameter 71 external control selection parameter 73 external fault automatic reset parameter 104 fault codes AAA ee 197 parameters eee eae 100 external reference data parameter 65 ACS510 User s Manual F fan maintenance aaarnas 207 fault COD SS ux i rupe octets he a ts AUS aset 196 comm FBA renret minen aaa 181 comm failure EFB 149 current at history parameter 70 digital input status at history parameter 70 frequency at history parameter 70 functions parameter group 100 hiStObyo s cues oU Epio EANDEM 201 history parameter group 70 last history parameter 70 MISTING P 196 previous history parameter 70 OSOb cse a xt eU NAA 200 reset select parameter 84 speed at history parameter 70 status at history parameter 70 time of history parameters 70 torque at histor
26. 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 4 DITP 2P 3 Three wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons as described for DI1P 2P Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI3 DI3 activated Reverse de activated Forward 5 DITP 2P 3P Start Forward Start Reverse and Stop Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start Forward command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input D11 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Start Reverse command is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI2 In order to start the drive the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI2 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI3 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 6 7 DI6 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 7 DI6 5 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input DI6 DI6 activated Start DI6 de activated Stop Dir
27. 92 DC magnetizing eee 92 flying Start fone nek eds hag ack RANG 92 start stop parameter group 92 start stop dir parameter group 71 starting order counter 134 start up MACOS coo ed EL Pg 25 motor data 25 LL AA AA 26 start up data parameter group 63 state diagram comm EFB 000 eee ee eee 170 comm ABB drives 188 status at fault history parameter 70 status word ABB drives FBA description 186 comm EFB definition 165 EBA rre et ee pue mA M T 176 FBA generic profile 193 stop aux motor PFC parameters 131 aux motor delay 131 Control a paa KA Paa NAL AA NG 30 dc brake time parameter 92 DC current control parameter 92 dc current ref parameter 92 emergency devices 214 emergency select parameter 93 flux braking parameter 97 function parameter 92 parameter group a 92 supervision parameter group lees 105 parameter low limit parameters 105 parameter selection parameters 105 supply phase fault code 198 switching frequency aa 219 erating shade cus eae ote ace RP 212 switching frequency control parameter 98 switching fre
28. ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 4 ACT ACT2 ACT times ACT2 provides the feedback signal 5 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal 6 MIN A1 A2 The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 7 MAX A1 A2 The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal 8 SQRT A1 A2 Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 9 SQA1 SQA2 Square root of AcT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal 10 SQRT ACT1 Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER Defines an extra multiplier for the PID FBK value defined by parameter 4014 Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference 0 NOT USED 32 768 32 767 Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL Example FBK Multiplier x A1 A2 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 117 Code Description 4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 ACT1 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 3 Current Uses current for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT O current Max ACT 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT1 scaled so e Min ACT 2 x nominal torque Max ACT 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT1 scaled so Min ACT
29. Position the ACS510 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS510 by its metal chassis 4 Re install the rubber plugs Non English speaking locations Add a warning ACS510 User s Manual IP2002 sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module Installation ACS510 User s Manual 13 A Wiring Overview Conduit Gland Kit Wiring drives with the IP 21 Enclosure requires a conduit gland kit with the following items Conduit gland box Five 5 cable clamps Screws Cover The kit is included with IP 21 Enclosures Wiring Requirements Warning Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACS510 The ACS510 must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the considerations defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 If in doubt contact your local ABB sales or service office As you install the wiring observe the following There are four sets of wiring instructions one set for each combination of drive enclosure type IP 21 and IP 54 and wiring type conduit or cable Be sure to select the appropriate procedure Determine electro magnetic compliance EMC requirements per local codes See Motor Cable Requirements for CE Compliance on
30. Process Variables 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 100 199 1 103 3402 SIGNAL 1 MIN 1 3403 SIGNAL 1 MAX 1 3404 ourPUT 1 DSP FORM Q 9 1 9 3405 OUTPUT 1 UNIT 0 127 1 3406 OUTPUT 1 MIN 1 3407 OUTPUT 1 MAX 1 3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100 199 1 104 3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN 1 3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX 1 3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM O 8 1 3412 OUTPUT 2 UNIT 128 127 1 3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN 1 3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX 1 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 199 1 105 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN 1 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 1 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM _ 0 8 1 3419 OUTPUT 3 UNIT 128 127 1 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN 1 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 1 Group 35 Motor Temp Meas 3501 SENSOR TYPE 0 6 1 0 3502 INPUT SELECTION 1 8 1 1 3503 ALARM LIMIT 10 200 C 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 1 110 C 1500 Ohm 0 3504 FAULT LIMIT 10 200 C 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 1 130 C 4000 Ohm 0 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 4001 GAIN 0 1 100 0 1 2 5 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0s NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1 s 3 0s 4003 DERIVATION TIME 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 0s 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 10 0 s 0 1 s 1 0s 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 0 4006 UNITS 0 31 4 4007 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4008 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 196 0 0 4007 4009 110096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 0 196 100 0 4007 4010 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 Y 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and s
31. Telefax 1 262 780 5135
32. To correct Check that the RS 485 lines are not swapped Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 153 Fault 28 Serial 1 Err If the drive s control panel shows fault code 28 SERIAL 1 ERR check for either of the following The master system is down To correct resolve problem with master system The communication connection is bad To correct check communication connection at the drive The time out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation The master is not polling the drive within the specified time out delay To correct increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Faults 31 33 EFB1 EFB3 The three EFB fault codes listed for the drive in Diagnostics starting on page 195 fault codes 31 33 are not used Intermittent Off line Occurrences The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with ACS510 serial communication Intermittent problems might also be caused by Marginally loose connections Wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations Insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the communication cables Embedded Fieldbus 154 ACS510 User s Manual Modbus Protocol Technical Data Overview The Modbus protocol was introduced by Modicon Inc for use in control environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers Due to its ease of use and implementation this common PLC language was quic
33. 1000 0 s 0 1 s 0 0 s 2208 EM DEC TIME 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s 2209 RAMP INPUT O 0 6 1 6 1 0 Start Up 56 ACS510 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User Group 25 Critical Speeds 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz Group 26 Motor Control 2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0 OFF 1 ON 1 1 2602 FLUX BRAKING 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 2603 JIR COMP VOLT 0 100 V 1 0 2604 R COMP FREQ 0 100 1 80 2605 U F RATIO 1 LINEAR 2 SQUARED 3 FREELY 1 2 DEFINED 2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1 4 8 12 kHz 4 kHz 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 0 OFF 1 ON 1 2608 ISLIP COMP RATIO 0 200 1 0 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 0 2610 USER U1 0 480 V 1V 76 V 2611 USERF1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 10 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 10 0 Hz
34. 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 0 36 45 1 0 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 0 36 45 1 0 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 0 36 45 1 0 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1414 RO4 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1416 Ro 5 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s Group 15 Analogue Outputs 1501 a01 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 103 1502 O1 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0103 1503 A01 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0103 1504 MINIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1506 FILTER AO1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99 199 1 104 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Defined by par 0104 1509 402 CONTENT MAX Defined by par 0104 1510 MINIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0 0 mA 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 20 0 mA 1512 FILTER AO2 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s Group 16 System Controls 1601 RUN ENABLE 0 7 1 6 1 0 Y 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0 2 1 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 55 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 1603 PASS CODE 0 65535 1 0 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 0 8 1 6 1 0 1605 USER PAR SET CHG 0 6 1 6 1 0 1606 LOCAL LOCK 0 8 1 6 1 0 1607 PARAM SAVE 0 DONE 1 SAVE 1 0
35. 1608 START ENABLE 1 0 7 1 6 1 0 1609 START ENABLE 2 0 7 1 6 1 0 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0 1 1 0 Group 17 Override Mode 1701 OVERRIDE SEL 0 6 1 6 1 0 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1Hz 0 0 N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 1704 OVERRIDE PASSCODE 0 65535 1 0 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0 1 1 0 Group 20 Limits 2003 IMAX CURRENT 0 1 1 lon 0 1A 1 1 lon Y 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE TIME 1 1 2 ENABLE 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 500 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz Y N688 50 0 50 0 Hz N689 55 0 55 0 Hz 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz Y N688 0 50 0 Hz N688 50 0 Hz N689 0 55 0 Hz N689 55 0 Hz Group 21 Start Stop 2101 START FUNCTION 1 5 1 1 Y 2102 STOP FUNCTION 1 COAST 2 RAMP 1 1 2103 DC MAGN TIME 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 30 s 2104 DC CURR CTL 0 2 0 Y 2106 DC CURR REF 0 100 1 30 2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0 0 250 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 2108 START INHIBIT 0 OFF 1 ON 1 0 Y 2109 EM STOP SEL 0 6 1 6 1 0 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15 300 1 100 Group 22 Accel Decel 2201 jacc DEc 1 2 SEL 0 7 1 6 1 5 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s 2203 DECELER TIME 1 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 30 0 s 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 O LINEAR 0 1 1000 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 2206 DECELER TIME 2 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 O LINEAR 0 1
36. 2 0 000 leen 214 MOLO Lu oaa ctu naan sas ate anand BGG 220 CE marking 000 e eee eee 236 changed parameters Assistant panel 32 chopper see braking Index 238 CISPR11 class A radiation limits 00 221 CISPR11 class B radiation limits celles 222 comm config file CPI firmware revision parameter 123 config file id revision parameter 123 config file revision parameter 123 fault function parameter 102 fault time parameter 102 fieldbus CPI firmware revision parameter 123 fieldbus parameter refresh parameter 123 fieldbus parameters 123 fieldbus status parameter 123 fieldbus type parameter 123 protocol select parameter 141 relay output word data parameter 66 values data parameter 66 comm EFB actual value scaling 150 actual values 150 analog output control activate 148 comm fault response 149 configuration aaa 145 configure for loss of communication 152 control interface 0005 142 control word 0 00 ce eee eee 162 diagnostics 0 000 eee eee eee 151 drive control of functions activate 146 exception codes 161 fault code 2 BA NG GARENA 153 fault code 31 i rarae
37. 35 COMM Relay Output 5 controlled 40134 bit 4 or 00037 Note 1 by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 35 COMM Relay Output 6 controlled 40134 bit 5 or 00038 Note 1 by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 40122 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status 40123 Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g PID setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 427 a au controlled by writing to 0135 COMM VALUE 1 parameter 0135 40135 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 a Bel coumans ER T UNA 5 controlled by writing to 40136 parameter 0136 Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 149 PID Control Setpoint Source Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops
38. 40301 bit 2 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 40118 Note With Modbus any parameter can be accessed using the format 4 followed by the parameter number Actual Value Scaling The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent In general for Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Complete Parameter List for ACS510 section for parameter resolutions For example kecdhack Parameter Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value Integer Resolution 1 0 1 MA 1 0 1 mA 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 196 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete Parameter Descriptions section specifies what parameter corresponds to 10096 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 151 For example Value of the 2 x Feedback Parameter Parameter that Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution 0 Of Integer Resolution defines 100 Value of 100 Ref 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm Note 1 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 196 500 Hz Note 2 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example t
39. 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 INV above 1606 LOCAL LOCK Defines control for the use of the LOC mode The LOC mode allows drive control from the control panel When LOCAL LOCK is active the control panel cannot change to LOC mode 0 NOT SEL Disables the lock The control panel can select LOC and control the drive 1 DI1 Defines digital input D11 as the control for setting the local lock Activating the digital input locks out local control De activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 above 7 ON Sets the lock The control panel cannot select LOC and cannot control the drive 8 coMM Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The Command Word is 0301 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock De activating the digital input locks out local control Activating the digital input enable the LOC selection 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for setting the local lock See DI1 INV above 1607 PARAM SAVE Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory Parameters altered
40. A Ground Fault Protection Max Motor Cable Length Frame Size fa 1 or 4 kHz fsw 8 kHz or 12 kHz R1 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft R2 R4 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft R5 R6 300 m 980 ft 150m 490 ft Warning Using a motor cable longer than specified in the chart above may cause permanent damage to the drive ACS510 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive motor or motor cable This fault logic Is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature Can be disabled using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT Could be tripped by leakage currents input power to ground associated with long high capacitance motor cables Technical Data 220 ACS510 User s Manual Grounding and Routing Motor Cable Shielding Motor cables require shielding using conduit armored cable or shielded cable Conduit When using conduit Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure Use a separate conduit run for motor cables also separate input power and control cables Use a separate conduit run for each drive Armored Cable When using armored cable Use six conductor 3 phases and 3 grounds type MC continuous corrugated aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables but not with control cables Shielded Cable For shield
41. DI1 INV Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 D11 activated EXT1 DI1 de activated EXT2 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 INV above 1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the reference source 1 al1 Defines analog input 1 A11 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source gt 2 AI2 Defines analog input 2 412 as the reference EXT REF 1 MIN source 3 Al1 JOYST Defines analog input 1 A11 configured for joystick operation as the reference source EXT REF 1 MAX The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum 2V 4mA reference in the reverse direction Define the minimum 0V 0mA using parameter 1104 EXT REF 1 MIN The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum reference in the forward direction Define the maximum EXT REF 1 MIN using parameter 1105 Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST Warning Because the low end of the reference range commands full reverse operation do not use 0 V as the lower end of the reference range Doing so means that if the control signal is lost which is a O V input the result is full reverse operation Instead use the following set up so that loss of the analog input triggers a fault stopping the drive Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 1304 MINIMUM AI2 at 20 2 V o
42. DI6 Third PFC Relay 4 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up 138 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 5 pi5 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI5 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI4 Free Not allowed DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI4 Free DI1 DI4 Free DI5 Speed Reg Motor DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 First PFC Relay DI6 Free 2 Not allowed DI1 DI4 Free DI5 First PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay 3 6 Notallowed Not allowed motor 6 DI6 Enables the Interlock function and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays 0 DI1 DI5 Free Not allowed DI6 Speed Reg Motor 1 Not allowed DI1 DI5 Free DI6 First PFC Relay 2 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 139 Code Description 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL Selects Regulator by pass control When enabl
43. Defines the filter time constant for A01 P 1510 e The filtered signal reaches 63 of a step change within the time AO CONTENT specified b See figure in parameter 1303 P 1503 1509 P 1502 1508 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output A02 See AO1 CONTENT above 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Sets the minimum content value See AO1 CONTENT MIN above 1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Sets the maximum content value See AO1 CONTENT MAX above 1510 MINIMUM A02 Sets the minimum output current See MINIMUM A01 above 1511 MAXIMUM A02 Sets the maximum output current See MAXIMUM A01 above Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 83 Code Description 1512 FILTER AO2 Defines the filter time constant for A02 See FILTER AO1 above Start Up 84 ACS510 User s Manual Group 16 System Controls This group defines a variety of system level locks resets and enables Code Description 1601 RUN ENABLE Selects the source of the run enable signal 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be activated for run enable If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the
44. Depends on Frame Size e R1 R4 Remove and discard the cable seals where conduit will be installed The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive R5 and R6 Use punch to create holes for conduit R5 R6 connections as needed 2 For each conduit run install water tight conduit connectors not supplied P5016 Route the power wiring through the conduit Route the motor wiring through the conduit Strip the wires oo HA o Connect the power motor and ground wires to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable IP5007 size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 217 7 Route the control cable through the conduit 8 Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail 9 Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end 10 Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 11 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 Installation ACS510 User s Manual 23 Check Installation Before applying power perform the following checks v Check Installation environment conforms to the drive s specifications for ambient conditions The drive is mount
45. Group 32 Supervision starting on page 105 9 SUPRV1 UNDER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 drops below the limit 3202 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 105 10 SUPRV2 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 exceeds the limit 3206 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 105 11 SUPRV2 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3204 drops below the limit 3205 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 105 12 SUPRV3 OVER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3207 exceeds the limit 3209 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 105 13 2 SUPRV3 UNDER Energize relay when second supervised parameter 3207 drops below the limit 3208 See Group 32 Supervision starting on page 105 14 AT SET POINT Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency 15 FAULT RST Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto reset delay See parameter 3103 delay time 16 FLT ALARM Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs 17 EXT CTRL Energize relay when external control is selected 18 REF 2 SEL Energize relay when EXT2 is selected 19 CONST FREQ Energize relay when a constant speed is selected 20 REF LOSS Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost 21 OVERCURRENT Energize relay when an o
46. IP2009 Note The control panel window must be closed to comply with IP 54 UL type 12 Optional Add a lock not supplied to secure the control panel window Installation ACS510 User s Manual 25 Apply Power A 1 Always re install the front cover before turning power on Warning The ACS510 will start up automatically at power up if the external run command is on Apply input power When power is applied to the ACS510 the green LED comes on Note Before increasing motor speed check that the motor is running in the desired direction Start Up The ACS510 has default parameter settings that are sufficient for many situations However review the following situations Perform the associated procedures as appropriate Motor Data 2 The motor data on the ratings plate may differ from the defaults in the ACS510 The drive provides more precise control and better thermal protection if you enter the rating plate data Gather the following from the motor ratings plate Voltage Nominal motor current Nominal frequency Nominal speed Nominal power Edit parameters 9905 9909 to the correct values Macros 2 Note Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design since the wiring installed in Control Terminals Table on page 17 depends o
47. LOC or remote REM Upper right Identifies parameter units Center Variable in general shows parameter values menus or lists Also displays a code for control panel errors See Alarm Codes Basic Control Panel on page 204 Lower left OUTPUT in the control mode or MENU when selecting alternate modes Lower right Motor rotation direction and indicates when a value can be edited EE F MENU ENTER key Enters deeper into menu level At deepest menu level saves display value as new setting EXIT RESET key Exits to next higher menu level Does not save changed values Down Scrolls down through a menu or Up list Scrolls up through a menu or list Decreases a value if a parameter is selected ncreases a value if a parameter is selected Increases the reference when in the reference mode of operation Decreases the reference when in the reference mode of operation DIR key Changes the motor s direction of rotation LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive STOP Stops the drive START Starts the drive FM Output Mode Use the Output mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the Output mode press EXIT RESET until the display shows s
48. N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 11 0 Hz 2612 USERU2 0 480 V 1V 152V 2613 USERF2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 20 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 22 0 Hz 2614 USERUS3 0 480 V 1V 228 V 2615 USERF3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 30 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 30 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 33 0 Hz 2616 USER U4 0 480 V 1V 304 V 2617 USERF4 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 40 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 40 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 44 0 Hz 2618 FW VOLTAGE 190 480 V 1V 380 V Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 57 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 30 Fault Functions 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION 0 3 1 0 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1 3 1 1 3003 JEXTERNAL FAULT 1 0 6 1 6 1 0 3004 JEXTERNAL FAULT 2 0 6 1 6 1 0 3005 IMOT THERM PROT 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 WARNING 1 1 FAULT 3006 MOT THERM TIME 256 9999 s 1 1050s 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50 150 1 100 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25 15096 1 7096 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1 250 Hz 1 35 Hz 3010 STALL FUNCTION 0 2 1 0 NOT SEL 3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0 5 50 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz 3012 STALL TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNC 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 WARNING O NOT SEL 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 10 400 s 1s 20s 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1 5 1 1 3017 EARTH FA
49. Relay output 1 Running 2 Al1 0 10 V EXT1 EXT2 selection D13 Relay output 2 Fault 1 9 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Interlock D14 5 Relay output 3 Aux motor ON Start Up 50 ACS510 User s Manual Macro Default Values for Parameters Parameter default values are listed in Complete Parameter List for ACS510 Changing from the default macro ABB Standard that is editing the value of parameter 9902 changes the parameter default values as defined in the following tables ACS510 01 5 9 Ble i 2 5 5 5 E Parameter d o 5 E 2 2 S 3 TS la 2 EES 5 a o g i i I amp bk ig n N 9902 APPLIC MACRO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 15 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 2 4 9 2 2 1 1 1 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 0 0 0 7 6 6 6 1003 DIRECTION 3 3 3 3 3 1 1 1 1102 ExT1 EXT2 SEL 0 0 0 0 3 2 3 3 1103 REF1 SELECT 1 1 1 12 1 1 1 1 1106 REF2 SELECT 2 2 2 2 2 19 19 19 1201 CONST SPEED SEL 9 10 9 5 0 9 0 0 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 0 0 20 20 20 20 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 31 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 31 31 1501 AO1 CONTENT 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 103 1503 A01 CONTENT MAX 50 50 50 50 50 50 52 52 1507 AO2 CONTENT 104 104 104 104 104 104 130 130 o o o o o o A A 1510 MINIMUM AO2 1601 RUN ENABLE o o Oo Oo A o N N 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 50
50. This parameter is not available in software option N688 and N689 Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires Drive parameter value set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive Parameter Value Description Protocol Reference 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Ref selected by fieldbus Required only if 2 references used 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI1 10 COMM AI1 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 supplied by fieldbus 9 COMM AI Required only if 2 references used 10 COMM Al Note Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the Reference Scaling in the following sections as appropriate ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data System Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 160
51. Two basic serial communications configurations are available Embedded fieldbus EFB See Embedded Fieldbus on page 142 Fieldbus adapter FBA With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive s expansion slot 2 the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the following protocols Profibus DP amp LonWorks amp CANopen DeviceNet ControlNet The ACS510 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the plug in fieldbus adapter The default settings for each protocol assume that the profile used is the protocol s industry standard drive profile e g PROFldrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet All of the FBA protocols can also be configured for the ABB Drives profile Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used These details are provided in a user s manual supplied with the FBA module Details for the ABB Drives profile which apply for all protocols are provided in ABB Drives Profile Technical Data on page 185 Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 175 Control Interface In general the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive consists of Output Words CONTROL WORD REFERENCE frequency Others The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words Protocols limits may further restrict the total nput Words STATUS WORD Actual Value frequency Others The drive supports
52. connected internally as floating 12 DCOM Digital input common To activate a digital input there must be 2 10 V or lt 10 V between that input and DCOM The 24 V may be provided by the e ACS510 X1 10 or by an external 12 24 V source of either polarity 2 magan nang 2 13 DI1 Digital input 1 programmable Default start stop 8 14 DI2 Digital input 2 programmable Default fwd rev 15 DI3 Digital input 3 programmable Default constant speed sel code 16 DI4 Digital input 4 programmable Default constant speed sel code 17 DI5 Digital input 5 programmable Default ramp pair selection code 18 DI6 Digital input 6 programmable Default not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable Default Ready 20 RO1A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2 A po Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 21 RO1B z 22 RO2C 4 Relay output 2 programmable Default Running E 23 RO2A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2 A S N Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA amp 24 RO2B _ Q 25 RO3C 4 Relay output 3 programmable Default Fault 1 26 RO3A Maximum 250 VAC 30 VDC 2A NT Minimum 500 mW 12 V 10 mA 27 ROBB Digital input impedance 1 5 kQ Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V 2 Default values depend on the macro used and software options Values specified are for the default macro See Application Macros on page 41
53. parameter group 94 at aux stop PFC parameter 140 ramp select parameter 94 ramp shape parameter 94 ramp time PFC parameter 140 ramp zero select parameter 95 time parameter n 0 0 0 eee 94 activate external PID parameter 121 actual input PID parameters 117 actual max PID parameters 117 actual min PID parameters 117 actual values mapping FBA generic profile 194 scaling EFBcomm 150 scaling FBA 22220005 182 scaling FBA ABB drives profile 192 scaling FBA generic profile 194 alarm CODES e ea tue AA 202 codes Basic control panel 204 enable display parameter 87 SIDAS e wooed ee ee aa oe edes 202 words data parameters 69 alternate macro 20200005 44 altitude derating 1 eee eee 212 environment limit 234 shipping limit 2 234 analog cable requirements aaan 229 analog I O connections 17 specifications lille esses 17 237 analog input data parameter 65 fault limit parameters 102 filter parameters 78 less than min auto reset parameter 104 less than min fault parameter
54. s Manual For less severe errors called alarms the diagnostic display is advisory For these situations the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something unusual In these situations the drive Flashes the green LED on the drive does not apply to alarms that arise from control panel operation errors Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter 0308 or 0309 See Group 03 FB Actual Signals on page 68 for the bit definitions Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and or name Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds The message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists The recommended corrective action for faults is Usethe Fault Listing table below to find and address the root cause of the problem Resetthe drive See Fault Resetting on page 200 Fault Listing Fault Fault Name In Description and Recommended Corrective Action Code Panel 1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DEC
55. 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED 6 CW 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator RFG output and changes the drive state to OPERATING The drive accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference Embedded Fieldbus 170 ACS510 User s Manual The state diagram below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits for the ABB Drives profile From any state From any state From any state Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault OFF3 CW Bit2 0 OFF2 CW Bit1 0 OFF3 OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 SW Bit5 0 Bibi ACTIVE ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I 0 V L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 SWITCH ON CN OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED SW Bit6 1 ACTIVE n f 0 1 0 Power ON CW BitO 0 L AB C D NOT READY MAS TO SWITCH on SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 aes OPERATION READY TO n SPEO INHIBITED SWITCH ON uae OPERATION INHIBITED CW Xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 L B C D READY TO 4 OPERATE XB CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and I SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED SYY BI2 1 A CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 i e Bit 421 KEY RFG OUTPUT State D ENABLED mmm State change pia 8 B Path described in example pere CW xxxx x1xx xx11 1111 CW CONTROL WORD i e Bit 5 1 SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Fu
56. 04A1 4 ACSA00 IF 11 3 ACSA00 IF 11 3 ACS510 01 07A2 4 ACS510 01 09A4 4 ACS510 01 012A 4 ACS510 01 017A 4 R2 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS510 01 025A 4 ACS400 IF21 3 ACS400 IF21 3 ACS510 01 031A 4 R3 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS510 01 038A 4 ACS400 IF31 3 ACS400 IF31 3 ACS510 01 045A 4 R4 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS400 1F4 1 3 ACS400 1F4 1 3 A Warning Do not use RFI EMC filters in a floating or impedance grounded network Technical Data 224 ACS510 User s Manual Brake Components Availability Braking availability for ACS510 drives by frame size is R1 and R2 a built in brake chopper is standard equipment Add appropriate resistor as determined using the following section Resistors are available from ABB R3 R6 does not include an internal brake chopper Connect a chopper and a resistor or a brake unit to the DC link terminals on the drive Contact your ABB representative for appropriate parts Selecting the Braking Resistors Frame Sizes R1 and R2 Braking resistor must meet three requirements Resistance must be always higher than the minimum value Rmin defined for the drive type in the following tables Never use resistance below this value Resistance must be low enough to be able to produce the desired braking torque To achieve the maximum braking torque the larger of 15096 of heavy duty or 110 of nominal duty the resistance must not exceed Rmax If
57. 110096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 1 100 4207 4210 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 4211 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 0 096 40 096 4207 4212 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4213 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4214 FBK SEL 1 10 1 4215 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 NOT USED 0 001 0 000 4216 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 2 4217 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 2 4218 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4219 ACT MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4220 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4221 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4228 ACTIVATE 6 12 0 4229 oFFSET 0 0 100 096 0 1 0 0 4230 TRIM MODE 0 2 1 0 4231 TRIM SCALE 100 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 4232 CORRECTION SRC 1 2 1 1 PID2 REF Group 51 Ext Comm Module 5101 FBA TYPE 1 0 5102 FBA PAR 2 26 0 65535 1 0 5126 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0 done 1 refresh 1 0 5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5131 FBA STATUS 0 6 1 0 5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 53 EFB Protocol 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0 0xFFFF 1 0 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 61 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 5302 EFB STATION ID 0 65535 1 1 Y 5303 EFB BAUD R
58. 120 175 285 1100 04A1 4 470 120 90 160 235 390 1500 05A6 4 320 120 125 235 345 570 2200 07A2 4 235 80 170 320 470 775 3000 09A4 4 192 80 210 400 575 950 4000 012A 4 128 80 315 590 860 1425 5500 017A 4 94 63 425 800 1175 1950 7500 025A 4 64 63 625 1175 1725 2850 11000 1 Resistor time constant specification must be gt 85 seconds WARNING Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance Symbols Rmin Minimum allowed braking resistor Rmax Maximum resistance allowed if maximum braking torque is necessary P Duty cycle based resistor power rating in deceleration braking where x is ONmax time Installing and Wiring Resistors A All resistors must be installed outside the drive module in a place where they can dissipate heat Warning The surface temperature of the resistor is very high and air flowing from the resistor is very hot Materials near the brake resistor must be non flammable Provide protection from accidental contact with the resistor To ensure that the input fuses protect the resistor cable use resistor cables with the same rating as used for the power input to the drive The maximum length of the resistor cable s is 10 m 33 ft See the Power Connection Diagrams on page 15 for the
59. 163 This parameter is not available in software option N688 and N689 Fieldbus Adapter 192 ACS510 User s Manual Actual Value As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Actual Value Scaling The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the resolution of the selected drive parameter Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6 below scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the Complete Parameter List for ACS510 section For example Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 2 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 196 1 Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile Data Word Contents Scaling 5 ACTUAL SPEED 20000 20000 par 1105 par 1105 6 TORQUE 10000 10000 100 100 Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 193 Generic Profile Technical Data Overview The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry standard drive profile for each protocol e g PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS AC DC Drive for DeviceNet Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system For specific CONTROL WORD content see the user s m
60. 23 RO2A fi Default operation 1 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 1202 24 RO2B pr Running gt 22 connected to 24 Q T CONSTANT SPEED 2 1203 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 1 1 CONSTANT SPEED 3 1204 26 RO3A f Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 2225 connected to 27 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Frequency e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current J1 Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready 2 Al1 0 10 V Ramp pair 1 of 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running 3 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 43 Application Macro 3 wire This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push buttons and provides three 3 constant speeds To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 2 3 WIRE Note When the stop input DI2 is deactivated no input the control panel start stop buttons are disabled Connection example X1 T ISCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External frequency reference 1 0 10 V KO 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 AI2 Not used 6 AGND Analo
61. 2412 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start stop Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward reverse Activation reverses rotation direction I 415 DI3 Reference up Activation increases the reference 16 DI4 Reference down Activation decreases the reference 17 DI5 Constant speed 1 1202 7 118 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A A Default operation 21lRO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable Note 1 For DI3 and DIA 23 RO2A Default operation AROR Running gt 22 connected to 24 Mesa ce ne ad KO Se OHA a programmable V The existing reference is stored efault operation F 27 RO3B LS Fault CAY 2525 connected to 27 during stop or power down Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed Reference up down DI3 4 Analog output AO2 Current J1 i o AI1 0 10 V Constant speed selection DI5 Relay output 1 Ready z Run enable DI6 e Relay output 2 Running 3 P Al2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up 46 ACS510 User s Manual Application macro Hand Auto This macro provides an I O configuration that is typically used in HVAC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 5 HAND AUTO Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT m
62. 7 2 x nominal power Max ACT 2 x nominal power 4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 Al 1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT2 2 Al 2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT2 3 Current Uses current for ACT2 scaled so Min ACT2 0 current Max ACT2 7 2 x nominal current 4 Torque Uses torque for ACT2 scaled so Min ACT2 7 2 x nominal torque Max ACT2 7 2 x nominal torque 5 Power Uses power for ACT2 scaled so Min ACT2 7 2 x nominal power Max ACT2 2 x nominal power 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT1 Used with analog input min max settings e g 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 Scales analog inputs used as actual values See figure A Normal B Inversion ACT1 MINIMUM gt ACT1 MAXIMUM 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT1 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM Sets the minimum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 4021 IACT2 MAXIMUM Sets the maximum value for ACT2 See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM ACT1 Yo A P 4019 P 4018 Pag P 1301 P 1302 Analog input signal ACT1 96 A B P 4018 P 40194 r e P 1301 P 1302 Analog input signal Start Up 118 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 4022 SLEEP SELECTION Defines the control for the PID sleep function 0 NOT SEL Disables the PID sleep control func
63. CTRL LOCATION Active control location Alternatives are 0 LOCAL 1 ExT1 2 EXT2 0114 RUN TIME R The drive s accumulated running time in hours h Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0115 KWH COUNTER R The drive s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT Application block output signal Value is from either PFC control if PFC Control is active or Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0118 DI1 3 STATUS Status of the three digital inputs iq Status is displayed as a binary number e 1 indicates that the input is activated l LI l O indicates that the input is deactivated X N 0119 14 6 STATUS pi 1 DI2 DI3 Status of the three digital inputs See parameter 0118 DI1 3 STATUS 0120 AI1 Relative value of analog input 1 in 96 Start Up 66 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 0121 AI2 The relative value of analog input 2 in 96 0122 RO1 3 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs l 1indicates that the relay is energized l O indicates that the relay is de energized 0123 RO4 6 STATUS RELAY 1 STATUS Status of the three relay outputs See parameter 0122 RELAY 2 STATUS RELAY 3 STATUS kis 0124 AO1 The analog output 1
64. Control Panel vivax x seas false eurer DAG Ca ewe ND BA 36 Application Macros 2 2 oa a a a a eee 41 Complete Parameter List for ACS510 0 eee 51 Complete Parameter Descriptions llle 63 Embedded Fieldbus OVelVIOW 3d reti PR ot a aata ki Ha tie E itd NG Et I Aa IPTE Te ad 142 PIBnning dx cs essc ir cp eeu A LB PP A UM Modos eur 143 Mechanical and Electrical Installation C EFB less 143 Communication Set up EFB 00 00 ee 144 Activate Drive Control Functions EFB 0000 00 0 00 e eee ee 146 Feedback from the Drive EFB 0 0 00 cee eee eee 150 Diagnostics EFB ne penned Pahokee hee eh eek eee bal aes 151 Modbus Protocol Technical Data 0 000000 ccc eee 154 ABB Control Profiles Technical Data 00 0 0 0 0c cee eee 162 Fieldbus Adapter OVeLVIOW o uicta RANA NG Tan sa ete cedars Sn con dete cap v iste font ENG ey ath dates 174 Planning essct ute WAN care Sorc Ak Re lee eee ad eS we ENS EM 176 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA less 177 Communication Set up FBA 000 cece eee ss 178 Activate Drive Control Functions FBA 0 000 eee eee 178 Feedback from the Drive FBA 0 202 RI 181 Diagnostics FBA cs tds soe ve ER ed Eee PAA NAA AA SEAS SEES 182 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data 00 eee eee 185 Generic Profile Technical Data 0 00 00 eee eee 193 Diagnostics Diagnos
65. EXT1 and EXT2 for commands that enable start stop and direction changes Locks direction or enables direction control To select between the two external locations use the next group parameter 1102 Code Description 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS Defines external control location 1 EXT1 the configuration of start stop and direction commands 0 NOT SEL No external start stop and direction command source 1 DI 1 Two wire Start Stop Start Stop is through digital input D11 DI1 activated Start D11 de activated Stop Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003 3 REQUEST is the same as 1003 1 FWD 2 DI1 2 Two wire Start Stop Direction Start Stop is through digital input D11 DI1 activated Start D11 de activated Stop Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI2 DI2 activated Reverse de activated Forward 3 DITP 2P Three wire Start Stop Start Stop commands are through momentary push buttons the P stands for pulse Start is through a normally open push button connected to digital input DI1 In order to start the drive the digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the pulse in DI1 Connect multiple Start push buttons in parallel Stop is through a normally closed push button connected to digital input DI2 Connect multiple Stop push buttons in series Parameter 1003 defines the direction Selecting 1003
66. Maximum output voltage of drive when the output frequency is controlled to level defined by parameter P9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Please see parmeter 2605 NOTE The actual output voltage reference is the lower value of the values of parameters P9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT and P2618 FW VOLTAGE Requirements for parameters setting P2618 gt P2616 gt P2614 gt P2612 gt P2610 and P9907 gt P2617 gt P2615 gt P2613 gt P2611 If this not true FAULT 1015 PAR USER DEFINED U F is generated only when P2605 u f RATIO 3 Start Up 100 ACS510 User s Manual Group 30 Fault Functions This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the drive should respond if the fault is detected Code Description 3001 3002 AI lt MIN FUNCTION Defines the drive response if the analog input Al signal drops below the fault limits and Al is used in reference chain 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 7 A11 Loss or 8 AI2 LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2006 Al1 Loss or 2007 AI2 Loss and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2006 A11 Loss or 2007 AI2 LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sur
67. When the clips barbs are free pull the housing up to remove from the drive The fan air flow is up refer to arrow on fan The fan wire harness is toward the front The notched housing barb is located in the right rear corner The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive Frame Sizes R5 and R6 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6 Capacitors Remove power from drive Remove the front cover Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable Install the fan in reverse order Restore power The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors Their life span is from 35 000 90 000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure Capacitor failure is usually followed by a input power fuse failure or a fault trip Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Maintenance ACS510 User s Manual 209 Control Panel Cleaning Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel Avoid harsh cleaners which could scratch the display window Maintenance 210 Technical Data Ratings ACS510 User s Manual By type code the table below provides ratings f
68. a maximum of 15 input words Protocols limits may further restrict the total Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACS510 However the profile used may set particular meanings Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Control Word CW Process I O References C cyclic Status Word SW Actual Values Service Messages Parameter R W Requests Responses i M Acyclic Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands from EXT1 set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The external plug in fieldbus adapter is activated Fieldbus Adapter 176 ACS510 User s Manual Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 4 EXT FBA The external plug in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile mode or d
69. above 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION Defines the wake up deviation a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value for at least the time period 4026 WAKE UP DELAY re starts the PID controller e Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale Parameter 4005 0 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation Parameter 4005 1 Wake up level Setpoint Wake up deviation e Wake up level can be above or below setpoint See figures e C Wake up level when parameter 4005 1 e D Wake up level when parameter 4005 0 e E Feedback is above wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up e F Feedback is below wake up level and lasts longer than 4026 WAKE UP DELAY PID function wakes up 4026 WAKE UP DELAY Defines the wake up delay a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE UP DEVIATION for at least this time period re starts the PID controller t P 4024 lt t P 4024 kag P 4023 y E X le P 4026 Setpoint C P 4025 400 21 Setpoint P 4025 4005 0 P 4025 Setpoint P 4025 O Start Up ACS5 10 User s Manual 119 Code Description 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET Defines how selections are made between PID Set 1 and PID Set 2 PID parameter set selection When set 1 is selected parameters 4001 4026 are used
70. along the top Use only two If possible use the two outside holes to allow room to remove the fan for maintenance Note ACS400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes For R1 and R2 frame sizes the mounting holes are identical For R3 and R4 frame sizes the inside mounting holes on the top of ACS510 drives match ACS400 mounts Remove Front Cover IP 21 1 Remove the control panel if attached 2 Loosen the captive screw at the top 3 Pull near the top to remove the cover IP2000 Installation 12 IP 54 1 If hood is present Remove screws 2 holding hood in place If hood is present Slide hood up and off of the cover Loosen the captive screws around the edge of the cover Remove the cover Mount the Drive IP 21 1 Position the ACS510 onto the mounting screws or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners Note Lift the ACS510 by its metal chassis Non English speaking locations Add a warning sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the module IP 54 For the IP54 enclosures rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for access to the drive mounting slots As required for access remove the rubber plugs Push plugs out from the back of the drive R5 amp RG Align the sheet metal hood not shown in front of the drive s top mounting holes Attach as part of next step
71. and hold for about 2 seconds or Press the key twice in quick succession The display shows the value of the selected parameter with under the value Note Briefly pressing the MENU ENTER key displays the parameter s current value for about 2 seconds During this display pressing the MENU ENTER key again also enables Riad Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired parameter value Note In Kia pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys simultaneously displays the default parameter value In Eig press MENU ENTER to save the parameter value being displayed Note If instead you press EXIT RESET the original or last saved parameter value is the active value Press EXIT RESET to step back to the Output mode Par Backup Mode The Basic Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters If two sets of parameters are defined both are copied and transferred when using this feature The Par Backup mode has three functions uL Upload Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes a second set of parameters if defined and internal parameters The Control Panel memory is non volatile rE A Restore All Restores the full parameter set s from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives Note The Restore All function writes all parameters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to re
72. at the motor rated 60 frequency set by parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ e Tm nominal torque of the motor 40 e fy nominal frequency of the motor 20 4 0 3017 EARTH FAULT Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is not running Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to ground faults 1 ENABLE Ground faults display fault 16 EARTH FAULT and if running the drive coasts to stop 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost 0 NOT SEL No response 1 FAULT Displays a fault 28 SERIAL 1 ERR and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2005 I o COMM and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2005 I O COMM and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds This alarm speed remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value Caution If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus communication is lost 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not tre
73. automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC UNDERVOLTAGE after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation AR AI MIN Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault Al lt MIN after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Warning When the analog input signal is restored the drive may restart even after a long stop Make sure that automatic long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and or damage equipment 3108 AR EXTERNAL FAULT Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault EXTERNAL FAULT 1 or EXTERNAL FAULT 2 after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation Start Up ACS510 User s Manual Group 32 Supervision 105 This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01 Operating Data Supervision monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit Use Group 14 Relay Outputs to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too low or too high Code Description 3201 3202 3203 3204 SUPERV 1 PARAM Se
74. because drive is busy try again 5085 Download is not allowed because drive types are incompatible 5086 Download is not allowed because drive models are incompatible 5087 Download is not allowed because parameter sets do not match 5088 Operation failed because a drive memory error was detected 5089 Download failed because a CRC error was detected 5090 Download failed because a data processing error was detected 5091 Operation failed because a parameter error was detected 5092 Download failed because parameter sets do not match 205 Diagnostics 206 Maintenance ACS510 User s Manual Warning Read Safety on page 3 before performing any maintenance on the equipment Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death Maintenance Intervals Heatsink If installed in an appropriate environment the drive requires very little maintenance This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB Maintenance Interval Instruction Heatsink temperature check and cleaning Main cooling fan replacement Depends on the dustiness of the environment every 6 12 months Every five years See Heatsink on page 206 See Main Fan Replacement on page 207 Internal enclosure cooling fan replacement IP 54 UL Type 12 units Every three years See Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement on 2
75. drive s input terminals Unsymmetrically grounded networks are defined in the following table In such networks the internal connection provided by the EM3 screw on frame sizes R1 R4 only must be disconnected by removing EM3 If the grounding configuration of the network is unknown remove EM3 Note that e ACS510 01 drives are shipped with the screw installed Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks EM3 Must Be Out Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1 corner of the mid point of a delta delta leg t12 Y L2 L3 L3 Single phase L1 Three phase grounded at an Variac without end point solidly grounded neutral N EM3 an M4x16 screw makes an internal ground connection that reduces electro magnetic emission Where EMC electro magnetic compatibility is a concern and the network is symmetrically grounded EM3 may be installed For reference the diagram at right illustrates a symmetrically grounded network Floating Networks A Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals For floating networks also known as IT ungrounded or impedance resistance grounded networks Disconnect the ground connection to the internal RFI filters ACS510 01 frame sizes R1 R4 Remove both the EM1 and EM3 screws see Power Connection Diagrams on page 15 Frame sizes R5 R6 Remove both the F
76. drive from a fieldbus controller The command consists of two Command Words Bit coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states To control the drive using the Command Words an external location EXT1 or EXT2 must be active and set to COMM See parameters 1001 and 1002 e The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0302 0303 0304 FB CMD WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2 See parameter 0301 FB STS WORD 1 Rean only copy of the Status Word 1 The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller The status consists of two Status Words The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 FB STS WORD 2 Read only copy of the Status Word 2 See parameter 0303 Bit 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0 STOP Reserved 1 START Reserved 2 REVERSE Reserved 3 LOCAL Reserved 4 RESET Reserved 5 EXT2 Reserved 6 RUN DISABLE Reserved 7 STPMODE R Reserved 8 STPMODE EM Reserved 9 STPMODE C Reserved 10 RAMP 2 Reserved 11 RAMP OUT 0 REF CONST 12 RAMP HOLD REF AVE 13 RAMP IN O LINK ON 14 RREQ LOCALLOC REQ STARTINH 15 Reserved OFF INT
77. enabled When enabled the drive stores the values of all parameters into an override parameter set see parameter 9902 and the parameters in Group 17 will be write protected except parameter 1704 To change the other parameters in the Group 17 override has to be disabled Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 91 Group 20 Limits This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor frequency current etc Code Description 2003 MAX CURRENT Defines the maximum output current A supplied by the drive to the motor 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC overvoltage controller on or off Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the DC bus voltage to rise to the overvoltage control limit To prevent the DC voltage from exceeding the trip limit the overvoltage controller automatically decreases the braking torque by increasing output frequency 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE Enables controller Warning If a braking chopper or a braking resistor is connected to the drive this parameter value must be set to 0 to ensure proper operation of the chopper 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off When on e If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit e When the motor speed decreases the inertia
78. fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the run disable signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal This digital input must be de activated for run enable If this digital input activates the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the run enable signal See DI1 INV above 1602 PARAMETER LOCK Determines if the control panel can change parameter values This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered See parameter 1603 PASS CODE 0 LOCKED You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603 1 OPEN You can use the control panel to change parameter values 2 NOT SAVED You can use the control panel to change parameter values but they are not stored in permanent memory Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 SAVE to store changed parameter values to memory 1603 PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock See parameter 1602 above e The code
79. fieldbus sets this bit it steals 0 Ext mon control and the drive moves to fieldbus local XIEmMaAV mode control mode 4 RESET gt 1 Reset Edge sensitive other no op 5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2 0 Switch to EXT1 6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable 0 Run enable on 7 STPMODE R 1 Normal ramp stop mode 0 no op Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 165 DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 8 STPMODE EM 1 Emergency ramp stop mode 0 no op 9 STPMODE C 1 Coast stop mode 0 no op 10 RAMP_2 1 Ramp pair 2 0 Ramp pair 1 11 RAMP OUT 0 1 Ramp output to 0 0 no op 12 RAMP HOLD 1 Ramp freeze 0 no op 13 RAMP IN 0 1 Ramp input to 0 0 no op 14 RREQ LOCALL 1 Local mode lock In lock drive will not switch to local mode of 0 no op 15 RESERVED DCU Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 0302 Bit Name Value Function Comments 16 26 Reserved 27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref These bits are only for supervision 0 TUUS purposes 28 REF AVE 1 Average speed ref 0 no op 29 LINK ON 1 Master is detected in link Link is down 30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request is pending 0 Start inhibit request is OFF 31 OFF INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel or PC tool this is pressed the OFF button interlock 0 no op S
80. from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1 4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0 63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 36 coMM 1 Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energize relay 1 relay 6 according to the following Par 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1 0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0 2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1 3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0 4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1 63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 De energize relay 1 Energize relay 45 OVERRIDE Energize relay when override mode is active 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 what relay output 2 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 what relay output 3 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 1 Control event i Halika On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1405 IRO 1 OFF DELAY Relay status Defines the switch off delay for relay 1 t E 4 On off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFC 1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY 1406 RO 2 ON
81. haa aan wale goad 153 fault code 32 0 ee eee 153 fault code 33 1 eee 153 fault tracing parameters 151 fault duplicate stations 152 fault intermittent off line 153 fault no master station on line 152 fault swapped wires 152 feedback from drive 150 input ref sel activate 147 installation n anaana a 143 misc drive control activate 147 modbus actual values 161 normal operation 152 OVeIVIOW sss be Sand deer uei PES ES 142 PID control setpoint source activate 149 planning suci ee RR NG 143 profiles i omae eue Es 155 reference scaling ABB drives profile 171 relay output control activate 148 Set ups Orr aL tats bees keg 144 start stop control activate 146 state diagram aa 170 status word ee 165 termination a 144 ACS510 User s Manual comm FBA actual values llle 176 analog output control activate 180 comm fault response 181 configuration 0 0 02 ee ee 178 control interface 000 175 control word 00 eee ee eee 175 control word ABB drives 185 diagnostics eis e ninaa a E e a A 182 drive feedback 2000005 181 fieldbus control activate 178 inpu
82. installation instructions carefully before proceeding Failure to observe the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard A Warning Before you begin read Safety on page 3 Installation Flow Chart The installation of the ACS510 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below The steps must be carried out in the order shown At the right of each step are references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the unit Task PREPARE for installation v PREPARE the Mounting Location v REMOVE the front cover v MOUNT the drive v INSTALL wiring v CHECK installation v RE INSTALL the cover v APPLY power START UP See Preparing for Installation on page 8 Prepare the Mounting Location on page 11 Remove Front Cover on page 11 Mount the Drive on page 12 Wiring Overview on page 13 and Install the Wiring on page 18 Check Installation on page 23 Re install Cover on page 24 Apply Power on page 25 Start Up on page 25 Installation 8 ACS510 User s Manual Preparing for Installation Lifting the Drive Lift the drive only by the metal chassis Unpack the Drive 1 Unpack the drive 2 Check for any damage and notify the shipper immediately if damaged components are found IP2040 3 Check the contents against the order and the
83. is equal to the value of Start up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from nominal 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve Output current 96 relative 4 to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 150 P3007 100 l l Frequency P 3009 ZERO SPEED LOAD have default values A pl A 5 4 lofln 3 0 7 60s 251 90 s 2 0 4 5 180s 1 5 NM oai 600 s 1 0 AT ki 0 5 4 fo fggk 0 l gt 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 1 2 lo Output current IN Nominal motor current fo Output frequency fgnk Break point frequency A Trip time Example Thermal protection trip times when parameters 3005 MOT THERM TIME 3006 MOT LOAD CURVE and 3007 3010 STALL FUNCTION This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function This protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region see figure for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME 0 NOT SEL Stall protection is not used 1 FAULT When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set by 3012 STALL TIME The drive coasts to stop A fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING When the drive operates in the stall region for the time Set by 3012 STALL TIME A warnin
84. motors goes like in standard PFC See the figure FOut Speed Req Motor in RO2 8109 START LOW FREQ 1 Start RO2 Motor1 ROI Motor2 Motor in RO2 is Speed Req Motor Motor in ROI is Aux Motor Start Up 128 ACS510 User s Manual In next two pages show the typical circuit digram of SPFC control Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 129 ATA aid W Start Up 130 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least one auxiliary constant speed motor is running Default value is 096 Example An ACS510 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels As water consumption increases first one constant speed pump operates then the second As flow increases the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely match the output pressure When the first auxiliary pump operates increase the reference with parame
85. of the load causes regeneration back into the drive keeping the DC bus charged and preventing an undervoltage trip The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride through on systems with a high inertia such as a centrifuge or a fan 0 DISABLE Disables controller 1 ENABLE TIME Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation 2 ENABLE Enables controller without maximum time limit for operation 2007 MINIMUM FREQ E i Freq 2007 value is lt 0 Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency P 2008 A positive or zero minimum frequency value defines two ranges one positive and one negative A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed range 0 y Time See figure Note Keep MINIMUM FREQ S MAXIMUM FREQ 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ EPA Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency Freq 2007 value is gt 0 P 2008 P 2007 0 P 2007 P 2008 Start Up 92 ACS510 User s Manual Group 21 Start Stop This group defines how the motor starts and stops The ACS510 supports several start and stop modes Code Description 2101 START FUNCTION Selects the motor start method 1 AUTO Selects the automatic start mode Immediate start from zero frequency 2 DC MAGN Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode Note Mode cannot start a rotating motor Note The drive starts when the set pre magnetizing time param 2103 has passed even
86. of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 e See above D11 2 for code 12 DI1 2 3 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 Uses three digital inputs as defined below O DI de activated 1 DI activated o Function No constant speed Constant speed 1 1202 Constant speed 2 1203 Constant speed 3 1204 Constant speed 4 1205 Constant speed 5 1206 Constant speed 6 1207 Constant speed 7 1208 al ol of ol o 9 NI a a a a ol ol ol Ao o O o O O Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 77 Code Description 13 DI3 4 5 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above D11 2 3 for code 14 DI4 5 6 Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 7 using DI5 DI6 and DI7 e See above D11 2 3 for code 1 DI1 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Inverse operation Digital input de activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input See above 7 DI1 2 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 Inverse operation uses two digital inputs as defined below 0 DI de activated 1 DI activated DI1 DI2 Function 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 Constant sp
87. page 220 In general Follow local codes for cable size Keep these four classes of wiring separated input power wiring motor wiring control communications wiring and braking unit wiring When installing input power and motor wiring refer to the following as appropriate Terminal Description Specifications and Notes U1 V1 W1 3 phase power supply input Input Power Connections on page 213 PE Protective Ground Ground Connections on page 215 U2 V2 W2 Power output to motor Motor Connections on page 219 To locate input power and motor connection terminals see Power Connection Diagrams starting on page 15 For specifications on power terminals see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 217 For frame sizes R1 R4 in unsymmetrically grounded networks see Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks on page 216 For floating or impedance grounded networks see Floating Networks on page 216 For frame size R6 see Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 217 to install the appropriate cable lugs Installation 14 ACS510 User s Manual For drives using braking optional refer to the following as appropriate Frame Size Terminal Description Braking Accessory R1 R2 BRK BRK Braking resistor Braking resistor See Brake Components on page 224 R3 R4 R5 R6 UDC UDC DC bus Contact your ABB representative to order either
88. parameter 2101 to select the start mode After the start command the drive pre magnetizes the motor for the time defined here and then starts the motor Setthe pre magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization Too long a time heats the motor excessively 2104 DC CURR CTL Selects whether DC current is used for braking or DC Hold 0 NOT SEL Disables the DC current operation 2 DC BRAKING Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has stopped If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 COAST braking is applied after start is removed If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 2 RAMP braking is applied after ramp 2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 2107 DC BRAKE TIME Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped if parameter 2104 is 2 DC BRAKING 2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the following situations a new start command is required A fault is reset Run Enable parameter 1601 activates while start command is active Mode changes from local to remote e Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1 0 OFF Disables the Start inhibit function 1 ON Enables the Start inhibit function Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 93 Code
89. parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET 2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFC autochange function is active note 1 Tocontrol PFC use parameter group 81 PFC CONTROL and Application Macro PFC on page 48 2015 PFC INTERLOCK This alarm warns that the PFC interlocks are active which means that the drive cannot start the following Any motor when Autochange is used The speed regulated motor when Autochange is not used 2016 RESERVED 2017 2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active which means note 1 that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends To control PID sleep use parameters 4022 4026 or 4122 4126 2019 RESERVED 2020 OVERRIDE This alarm warns that the override mode are activated which means that the drive run at override mode 2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing MISSING To control Start Enable 1 function use parameter 1608 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings Diagnostics 204 ACS510 User s Manual Alarm Code Display Description 2022 START ENABLE 2 MISSING This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing To control Start Enable 2 function use parameter 1609 To correct check Digital input configuration Communication settings 2023 EMERGENCY STOP Emergency stop activated 2024 If this alar
90. particles Class 252 The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACS510 passes Stress Tests Without Shipping Package Mechanical conditions In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B Inside Shipping Package Sinusoidal with IEC 60721 3 3 Class 3M4 specifications vibration 2 9 Hz 3 0 mm 0 12 in 9 200 Hz 10 m s 33 ft s Shock Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68 2 29 max 100 m s 330 ft s 11ms 36 fts Not allowed 76 cm 30 in frame size R1 61cm 24 in frame size R2 Free fall 46 cm 18 in frame size R3 31 cm 12 in frame size R4 25 cm 10 in frame size R5 15 cm 6 in frame size R6 Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual Materials 235 Material Specifications Drive enclosure PC ABS 2 5 mm color NCS 1502 Y RAL 90021 PMS 420 C and 425 C Hot dip zinc coated steel sheet 1 5 2 mm thickness of coating 20 micrometers Cast aluminium AISi Extruded aluminium AISi Package Corrugated board expanded polystyrene plywood raw wood heat dried Package wrap consists of one or more of the following PE LD plastic wrap PP or steel bands Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy and natural resources The package materials are environmentally compatible and recyclable All metal parts can be recycled The plastic parts can either be recycled or b
91. right of the entry 0 0008 3 See table for example using pi 3 14159 1 0031 3 1 2 0314 3 14 3 3142 3 142 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 115 Code Description 4008 0 VALUE l l l Units P4006 Defines together with the next parameter the scaling applied to Scale P4007 1000 the PID controller s actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 4 P and 0132 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 P 4009 i 4009 100 VALUE Defines together with the previous parameter the scaling applied to the PID controller s actual values P4008 Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 a E 0 100 1000 Internal scale 4010 SET POINT SEL Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by passed see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 keypad Control panel provides reference 1 Al1 Analog input 1 provides reference 2 Al2 Analog input 2 provides reference 8 comm Fieldbus provides reference 9 COMM Al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 comm AI Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 11 DI3U 4D RNC Digital inputs acting as a motor potentiometer contr
92. s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC External control location 2 EXT2 selected External control location 1 EXT1 selected 12 13 15 EXT RUN ENABLE Unused External Run Enable signal received oO oj No External Run Enable signal received Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 167 DCU Profile The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0303 Bit Name Value Status 0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command 0 Drive is not ready 1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received 0 No external run enable signal received 2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command 0 Drive has not received start command 3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating 0 Drive is not modulating 4 ZERO SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed 0 Drive has not reached zero speed 5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating 0 Drive is not accelerating 6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating 0 Drive is not decelerating 7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint 0 Drive has not reached setpoint 8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 settings 0 Operation is within Group 20 settings 9 SUPERVISION 1 A
93. screw 1P2003 Installation 20 ACS510 User s Manual Wiring IP 21 Enclosure with Conduit 1 3 Install conduit gland box 4 Connect conduit runs to box 6 Strip wires 7 Connect power motor and ground wires to the drive 10 11 12 13 Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See Conduit Gland Kit above Install thin wall conduit clamps not supplied Route input power and motor wiring through conduits must be separate conduit runs terminals 1P2004 Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 217 Route the control cable through the conduit must be A La separate from input power and motor conduit runs Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 Install the conduit gland box cover 1 screw IP2005 Installation ACS510 User s Manual 21 Wiring IP 54 Enclosure with Cables 1 10 11 Route both cables through the clamps and tighten eg Strip contr
94. start delay parameter 131 aux motor stop delay parameter 131 control parameter group 126 deceleration time parameter 140 enable parameter 139 low frequency parameters 131 macro number of aux motors parameter 132 number of motors parameter 140 reference step parameters 130 start delay parameter 139 start frequency parameters 130 Index ACS510 User s Manual PID 0 actual signal parameter 100 actual signal parameter actual input select parameters actual value max parameters actual value min parameters adjustment procedure control macro correction source parameter decimal point actual signal parameter derivation filter parameter derivation time parameter deviation data parameter error feedback inversion parameter external trimming parameter group external source activate parameter feedback multiplier parameter feedback select parameter feedback data parameter gain parameter integration time parameter internal setpoint parameter offset parameter output data parameter parameter set select parameter proc
95. supervised parameter Group 32 is outside its limits 0 All supervised parameters are within limits 10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction 0 Drive reference is in forward direction 11 REV ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction 0 Drive is running in forward direction 12 PANEL LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel or PC tool local mode 0 Control is not in control panel local mode 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode steals control panel local 0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode 14 EXT2 ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode 0 Control is in EXT1 mode 15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state 0 Drive is not in a fault state Embedded Fieldbus 168 ACS510 User s Manual DCU Profile STATUS WORD See Parameter 0304 Bit Name Value Status 16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on 0 No alarms are on 17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending 0 No maintenance request is pending 18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON Direction change is locked out 0 Direction lock is OFF 19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON Local mode is locked out 0 Local mode lock is OFF 20 25 Reserved 26 REQ CTL 1 Copy the control word 0 no op 27 REQ REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel 0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel 28 REQ REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel 0 Reference 2 is not reques
96. the IP 21 enclosure A different outer plastic cover An additional internal fan to improve cooling Larger dimensions The same rating does not require a derating Technical Data 234 Ambient Conditions ACS510 User s Manual The following table lists the ACS510 environmental requirements Ambient Environment Requirements Installation Site Storage and Transportation in the protective package 0 1000 m 0 3 300 ft e 1000 2000 m 3 300 6 600 ft if Altitud PS Pn and l derated 1 every 100 m above 1000 m 300 ft above 3 300 ft e Min 15 C 5 F no frost allowed 40 70 C 40 158 F Max fsw 1 or 4 40 C 104 F 50 C 122 F if Ambient Pn and l gt derated to 90 temperature Max fsw 8 40 C 104 F if Py and derated to 80 Max fsw 12 30 C 86 F if Py and derated to 65 Relative lt 95 non condensing humidity Contamination levels IEC 721 3 3 No conductive dust allowed The ACS510 should be installed in clean air according to enclosure classification Cooling air must be clean free from corrosive materials and free from electrically conductive dust Chemical gases Class 3C2 Solid particles Class 382 Storage Transportation No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 1C2 Solid particles Class 1S2 No conductive dust allowed Chemical gases Class 2C2 Solid
97. the following table Value Setting Al reference is calculated as following C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value B value 50 of reference value C B C value 5096 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B value Where e C Main Reference value COMM for values 9 10 and AIT for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN 0 e P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT Sets a constant value used for the process reference Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4013 SETPOINT MAX Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source See parameter 4010 4014 FBK SEL Defines the PID controller feedback actual signal You can define a combination of two actual values ACT1 and ACT2 as the feedback signal Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 ACT1 Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 ACT2 1 acT1 Actual value 1 ACT1 provides the feedback signal 2 ACT1 ACT2 ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal 3
98. the parameters in group 17 as needed Digital input for override mode P1701 Frequency reference P1702 5 Enter the pass code P1704 6 Enable the override mode P1705 The drive replaces the override parameter set with new values of all parameters Code Description 1701 OVERRIDE SEL Selects the source of the override activation signal 0 NOT SEL Override activation signal not selected 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the override activation signal This digital input must be activated for override activation signal 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal 2 6 DI2 INV DIG INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the override activation signal g e See DI INV above 1702 OVERRIDE FREQ Defines a preset frequency for the override Start Up 90 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 1704 JOVERRIDE PASS CODE Entering the correct pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change Enter the pass code always before changing the value of the parameter 1705 See parameter 1705 below The pass code is 358 The entry reverts back to zero automatically 1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled 0 OFF Override disabled 1 ON Override
99. the sensor The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC reference temperature 7 1 as does 550 the voltage over the resistor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 and converts it into ohms The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 100 the motor operating temperature 1330 Temperature Resistance Normal 0 1 5 kohm Excessive gt 4kohm 5 THERMISTOR 0 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 0 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group 6 THERMISTOR 1 Sensor configuration uses a thermistor Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital input The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table When the digital input is 1 the motor is overheated See the figures in the introduction to this Group INPUT SELECTION Defines the input used for the temperature sensor 1 AI1 PT100 and PTC 2 AI2 PT100 and PTC 3 8 DI1 DI6 Thermistor 3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm l
100. the type code Also when using the Ratings table note that the table is broken into sections based on the drive s Voltage rating Motor Compatibility The motor drive and supply power must be compatible Motor Specification Verify Reference Motor type 3 phase induction motor Nominal current Motor value is within this Type code label on drive entry for Output l range 0 2 2 0 lon or Type code on drive and rating table in Technical Data on page 210 Nominal frequency 10 500 Hz N688 10 50Hz N689 10 55Hz Voltage range Motor is compatible with 380 480 V the ACS510 voltage range Tools Required To install the ACS510 you need the following e Screwdrivers as appropriate for the mounting hardware used Wire stripper Installation 10 ACS510 User s Manual Tape measure Drill Mounting hardware screws or nuts and bolts four each The type of hardware depends on the mounting surface and the frame size Frame Size Mounting Hardware R1 R4 M5 10 R5 M6 1 4 in R6 M8 5 16 in Suitable Environment and Enclosure Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements To prevent damage prior to installation store and transport the drive according to the environmental requirements specified for storage and transportation See Ambient Conditions on page 234 Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate based on the s
101. this manual The installation rules of this manual are followed EMC This section describes conformance with EMC requirements Technical Data 236 ACS510 User s Manual CE Marking When a CE mark is attached to the ACS510 AC drive it verifies that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC and Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by 93 68 EEC The corresponding declarations are available on request and can be found using the internet at http www abb com The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used in European Economic Area The EMC product standard EN 61800 3 covers the requirements stated for drives such as the ACS510 The drive complies with the First environment restricted distribution and Second Environment limits of EN IEC 61800 3 Electromagnetic Environments Product standard EN 61800 3 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems Part 3 EMC product standard including specific test methods defines First Environment as environment that includes domestic premises It also includes establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes Second Environment includes establishments other than those directly connected to a low voltage power supply network which supplies b
102. value in milliamperes 0125 AO2 The analog output 2 value in milliamperes 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT The PID Controller 1 output value in 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT The PID Controller 2 output value in 0128 PID 1 SETPNT The PID 1 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0129 PID 2 SETPNT The PID 2 controller setpoint signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0130 PID 1 FBK The PID 1 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0131 PID 2 FBK The PID 2 controller feedback signal Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value Units and scale defined by PID parameters 0134 COMM RO WORD Free data location that can be written from serial link Used for relay output control See parameter 1401 0135 COMM VALUE 1 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Free data location that can be written from serial link 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 Process variable 1 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 Process variable 2 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables Sta
103. when an invalid message CRC is received 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all advances when character format errors are detected such as parity or framing errors 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic Loss of Communication The ACS510ACS510 behavior if communication is lost was configured earlier in Communication Fault The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME The Complete Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail No Master Station on Line If no master station is on line Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS increase on any of the stations To correct Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the network Verify that the cable is connected and is not cut or short circuited Duplicate Stations If two or more stations have duplicate numbers Two or more drives cannot be addressed Everytime there is a read or write to one particular station the value for 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances To correct Verify the station numbers of all stations Change conflicting station numbers Swapped Wires If the communication wires are swapped terminal A on one drive is connected to terminal B on another The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing
104. 006 4106 and 4007 4107 0129 PID 2 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0130 PID 1 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0131 PID 2 FBK Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0132 PID 1 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4006 4106 and 4007 4107 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 4207 0134 COMM RO WORD 0 65535 1 0 0135 COMM VALUE 1 32768 32767 1 0 0136 COMM VALUE 2 32768 32767 1 0 0137 PROCESS VAR 1 1 0138 PROCESS VAR 2 1 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 1 0140 RUN TIME 0 00 499 99 kh 0 01 kh 0 kh 0141 MWH COUNTER 0 9999 MWh 1 MWh 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0 65535 1 0 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI Days 1 day 0 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO hh mm ss 1 2s 0 0145 MOTOR TEMP 10 200 C 0 5000 Ohm 0 1 1 0 0146 Not used 0148 0149 OVERRIDEACTIVED 0 1 1 0 Group 03 FB Actual Signals 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 0302 FB CMD WORD 2 0303 FBSTS WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 1 0 0305 FAULT WORD 1 1 0 0306 FAULT WORD 2 1 0 0307 FAULT WORD 3 1 0 0308 ALARM WORD 1 1 0 0309 ALARM WORD 2 1 0 Group 04 Fault History 0401 LAST FAULT Fault codes panel displays as text 1 0 0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd mm yy power on time in days 1 0 0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh mm ss 2s 0 0404 SPEED AT FLT 1 rpm 0 0405 FREQ AT FLT 0 1 Hz 0 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT 0 1 V 0
105. 08 Capacitor change Frame sizes R5 and R6 Every ten years See Capacitors on page 208 The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air Since a dusty heatsink is less efficient at cooling the drive overtemperature faults become more likely In a normal environment not dusty not clean check the heatsink annually in a dusty environment check more often Clean the heatsink as follows when necessary Remove power from drive Remove the cooling fan see section Main Fan Replacement on page 207 Blow clean compressed air not humid from bottom to top and simultaneously use a vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust Note If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment perform the cleaning in another room Replace the cooling fan Restore power Maintenance ACS510 User s Manual 207 Main Fan Replacement The drive s main cooling fan has a life span of about 60 000 operating hours at maximum rated operating temperature and drive load The expected life span doubles for each 10 C 18 F drop in the fan temperature fan temperature is a function of ambient temperatures and drive loads Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms star
106. 1 and F2 screws see page 16 Where EMC requirements exist check for excessive emission propagated to neighboring low voltage networks In some cases the natural suppression in Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 217 transformers and cables is sufficient If in doubt use a supply transformer with static screening between the primary and secondary windings Do NOT install an external RFI EMC filter such as one of the kits listed in EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables on page 221 Using an RFI filter grounds the input power through the filter capacitors which could be dangerous and could damage the unit Drive s Power Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s power connection terminals U1 V1 W1 Frame U2 V2 W2 Earthing PE Terminal Size BRK UDC Terminals Min Wire Size Max Wire Size Torque Max Wire Size Torque mm AWG mm AWG Nm lb ft mm AWG Nm Ib ft R1 0 75 18 16 13 1 16 6 1 3 1 R2 0 75 18 16 13 1 16 6 1 3 1 R3 2 5 14 25 3 27 2 25 3 2 7 2 R4 10 8 50 1 0 56 4 50 1 0 5 6 4 R5 16 6 70 2 0 15 11 70 2 0 15 11 R6 95 3 0 185 350 MCM 40 30 185 350 MCM 40 30 1 Do not use aluminum cable with frame sizes R1 R4 Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size A Warning For R6 power terminals if compression lugs are supplied they can only be used for wire sizes that are 95
107. 1 minute Cable Specifications See Control Terminals Table on page 17 Control Cables General Recommendations Use multi core cables with a braided copper wire screen temperature rated at 60 C 140 F or above Double Shielded Single Shielded Example JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example NOMAK by Draka NK Cables At the drive end twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its width and connected to terminal X1 1 for digital and analog I O cables or to either X1 28 or X1 32 for RS485 cables Leave the other end of the cable shield unconnected Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables at least 20 cm 8 in Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as near 90 as possible Stay atleast 20 cm 8 in from the sides of the drive Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable Donot mix analog and digital input signals on the same cable Runrelay controlled signals as twisted pairs especially if voltage gt 48 V Relay controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital input signals Note Never mix 24 VDC and 115 230 VAC signals in the same cable Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 229 Analog Cables Recommendations for analog signal runs Use double shielded twisted p
108. 11 DI3U 4D RNC Same as DI3U 4D R above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 13 DIBU 6D NC Same as DI5U 6D above except that Changing the control source EXT1 to EXT2 EXT2 to EXT1 LOC to REM does not copy the reference 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 Al1 Al2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 Al2 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in the following table Value Al reference is calculated as following Setting C B C value B value 50 of reference value IC B C value B value 5096 of reference value C B C value 50 of reference value B value C B C value 50 of reference value B v
109. 157 The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils 01 Function Code Description Read coil status 05 Force single coil 15 OxOF Hex Force multiple coils 1xxxx Mapping Modbus Discrete Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs Bit wise map of the STATUS WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose Discrete hardware inputs numbered sequentially beginning with input 33 The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 OR 2 5305 1 10001 STATUS WORD Bit 0 RDY_ON READY 10002 STATUS WORD Bit 1 RDY RUN ENABLED 10003 STATUS WORD Bit 2 RDY REF STARTED 10004 STATUS WORD Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING 10005 STATUS WORD Bit 4 OFF 2 STA ZERO SPEED 10006 STATUS WORD Bit 5 OFF 3 STA ACCELERATE 10007 STATUS WORD Bit 6 SWC ON INHIB DECELERATE 10008 STATUS WORD Bit 7 ALARM AT SETPOINT 10009 STATUS WORD Bit 8 AT SETPOINT LIMIT 10010 STATUS WORD Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION 10011 STATUS WORD Bit 10 ABOVE LIMIT REV REF 10012 STATUS WORD Bit 11 EXT2 REV ACT 10013 STATUS WORD Bit 12 RUN ENABLE PANEL LOCAL 10014 STATUS WORD Bit 13 N A FIELDBUS LOCAL 10015 STATUS WORD Bit 14 N
110. 2 Defines the minimum value of the analog input Please See parameter 1302 MINIMUM AI1 MAXIMUM Al2 Defines the maximum value of the analog input Please See parameter 1302 MINIMUM Al1 1306 FILTER AI2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 A12 Please See parameter 1303 FILTER A1 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 79 Group 14 Relay Outputs This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs Code Description 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 what relay output 1 means 0 NOT SEL Relay is not used and is de energized 1 READY Energize relay when drive is ready to function Requires Run enable signal present No faults exist Supply voltage is within range Emergency Stop command is not on 2 RUN Energize relay when the drive is running 3 FAULT 1 Energize relay when power is applied De energizes when a fault occurs 4 FAULT Energize relay when a fault is active 5 ALARM Energize relay when an alarm is active 6 REVERSED Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction 7 STARTED Energize relay when drive receives a start command even if Run Enable signal is not present De energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs 8 SUPRV1 OVER Energize relay when first supervised parameter 3201 exceeds the limit 3203 See
111. 2 Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault See parameter 3003 above MOT THERM PROT Defines the drive response to motor overheating 0 NOT SEL No response and or motor thermal protection not set up 1 FAULT When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault 9 MOT OVERTEMP and the drive coasts to stop 2 WARNING When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C displays a warning 2010 MOT OVERTEMP MOT THERM TIME Motor load 4 Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature model e This is the time required for the motor to reach 63 of the final temperature with steady load For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA Temp Rise class motors use the rule of thumb MOTOR THERM TIME equals 100 ya 35 times t6 where t6 in seconds is specified by the motor 63 t manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at six times its rated current e The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s for a Class P 3006 Vo 20 trip curve 700 s and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 101 Code Description 3007 MOT LOAD CURVE Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor When set to 100 the maximum allowable load
112. 2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 4 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Free 5 Not allowed DI1 Free DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI6 Fifth PFC Relay 6 Not allowed Not allowed Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 137 Code Description 3 DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input starting with DI3 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI2 Free Not allowed DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI4 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DIA First PFC Rel
113. 2 PFC START DELAY Starts the speed regulated motor Starts auxiliary motors See parameter 8115 for delay Warning Motors equipped with star delta starters require a PFC Start Delay After the ACS510 relay output switches a motor On the star delta starter must switch to the star connection and then back to the delta connection before the drive applies power So the PFC Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star delta starter 8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control When enabled PFC control Switches in or out auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases Parameters 8109 START FREQ 1 to 8114 Low FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down as auxiliary motors are added and adjusts the speed regulated motor output up as auxiliary motors are taken off line Provides Interlock functions if enabled 0 NOT SEL Disables PFC control 1 ACTIVE Enables PFC control 2 CYCLE SOFT START Enables PFC control and use cycle soft start function Require parameter 8118 value gt 0 Start Up 140 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero to maximum frequency ramp This PFC acceleration ramp Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched off Replaces the acc
114. 250 The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any other safety equipment that may be needed Pressing STOP on the drive s control panel does NOT Generate an emergency stop of the motor Separate the drive from dangerous potential Input wiring can be any of Afour conductor cable three phases and ground protective earth Shielding is not required Four insulated conductors routed through conduit Size wiring according to local safety regulations appropriate input voltage and the drive s load current In any case the conductor must be less than the maximum limit defined by the terminal size see Drive s Power Connection Terminals on page 217 Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 215 The table below lists copper and aluminum cable types for different load currents These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table NEC Based on Based on EN 60204 1 and IEC 60364 5 2 2001 NEC Table 310 16 for copper wires PVCinsulation 90 C 194 F wire insulation 30 C 86 F ambient temperature 40 C 104 F ambient temperature e 70 C 158 F surface temperature Not more than three current carrying Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable or eart
115. 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once This entry reverts back to 0 automatically 1604 FAULT RESET SEL Selects the source for the fault reset signal The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no longer exists 0 KEYPAD Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source Fault reset is always possible with control panel 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source Activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source See DI1 above 7 START STOP Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start stop and direction commands 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 resets the drive 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source De activating the digital input resets the drive 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as a fault reset source e See DI1 INV above Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 85 Code Description 1605 USER PAR SET CHG Defines control for changing the user parameter set See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO The drive must be stopped to change User Paramet
116. 4 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fieldbus Fieldbus Adapter 180 ACS510 User s Manual Drive Parameter Value Description Protocol Reference 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to memory then value returns to 0 Relay Output Control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive Parameter Value Description VE duci 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 COMM 1 Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus 1 More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module Note Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below Drive Parameter Value Protocol Reference 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS Relay 1 3 status 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS Relay 4 6 status Analog Output Control Using the fieldbus for analog output control e g P
117. 50 50 50 50 50 52 52 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 5 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 103 3401 SIGNAL 1 PARAM 103 102 102 102 102 102 103 103 4001 GAIN 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 2 5 25 2 5 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4101 GAIN 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5 2 5 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60 60 60 60 60 60 3 3 8118 AUTOCHG INTERV 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2 This parameter is not available in software option N688 and N689 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual Complete Parameter List for ACS510 The following table lists all parameters Table header abbreviations are e S Parameters can be modified only when the drive is stopped User Space to enter desired parameter values 51 Some values vary depending on the drive software options This is indicated by N688 or N689 in the table below Refer to the type code on the drive namplate For example ACS510 01 N688 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S Group 99 Start Up Data 9901 LANGUAGE 0 2 1 0 9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 7 15 1 1 Y 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 200 600 V 1V 400 V Y 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0 2 l5 2 0 I54 0 1A 1 0 l54 Y 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz Y N688 10 0 50 0 Hz N688 50 0 Hz N689 10 0 55 0 Hz N689 55 0 Hz 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50 30 000 rpm 1 rpm Size depend
118. 6 Installation ACS510 User s Manual 17 Control Terminals Table The following provides information for connecting control wiring at X1 on the drive X1 Hardware Description 1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen Connected internally to chassis ground 2 A Analog input channel 1 programmable Default frequency reference Resolution 0 1 accuracy 196 J1 Al1 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 kQ 2 p gt J1 AI1 ON 0 20 mA R 100 Q 5 o AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 4 10V Potentiometer reference source 10 V 296 max 10 mA 1kQ lt R lt 10kQ o Al2 Analog input channel 2 programmable Default not used Resolution 0 1 E accuracy t196 EF J1 Al2 OFF 0 10 V Rj 312 KQ 2 p gt J1 AI2 ON 0 20 mA Rj 100 Q o 6 AGND Analog input circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 7 AO1 Analog output programmable Default frequency 0 20 mA load 500 8 AO2 Analog output programmable Default current 0 20 mA load 500 Q 9 AGND Analog output circuit common connected internally to chassis gnd through 1 MQ 10 424V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 250 mA reference to GND short circuit protected 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
119. 96 100 0 4107 4110 SET POINT SEL 0 19 1 1 Y 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 196 40 0 4107 4112 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4113 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 4114 FBK SEL 1 10 1 4115 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 NOT USED 0 001 0 4116 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 2 Y 4117 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 2 Y 4118 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4119 ACT MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4120 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4121 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4122 SLEEP SELECTION 0 7 1 6 0 4123 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 4124 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s Start Up 60 ACS510 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 4125 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 4107 4126 WAKE UP DELAY 0 00 60 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s Group 42 Ext Trim PID 4201 GAIN 0 1 100 0 0 1 1 0 4202 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0s NOT SEL 0 1 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4203 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 4204 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 1 0s 4205 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 0 4206 UNITS 0 31 4 4207 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4208 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4206 and 1 096 4207 4209
120. A EXT2 ACT 10016 STATUS WORD Bit 15 N A FAULT 10017 STATUS WORD Bit 16 Reserved ALARM 10018 STATUS WORD Bit 17 Reserved REQ MAINT 10019 STATUS WORD Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK 10020 STATUS WORD Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK 10021 STATUS WORD Bit 20 Reserved CTL MODE 10022 STATUS WORD Bit 21 Reserved Reserved 10023 STATUS WORD Bit 22 Reserved Reserved 10024 STATUS WORD Bit 23 Reserved Reserved 10025 STATUS WORD Bit 24 Reserved Reserved 10026 STATUS WORD Bit 25 Reserved Reserved 10027 STATUS WORD Bit 26 Reserved REQ CTL Embedded Fieldbus 158 ACS510 User s Manual Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE Ref All Profiles 5305 0 OR 2 5305 1 10028 STATUS WORD Bit 27 Reserved REQ REF1 10029 STATUS WORD Bit 28 Reserved REQ REF2 10030 STATUS WORD Bit 29 Reserved REQ REF2EXT 10031 STATUS WORD Bit 30 Reserved ACK STARTINH 10032 STATUS WORD Bit 31 Reserved ACK OFF ILCK 10033 DI1 DI1 DI1 10034 DI2 DI2 DI2 10035 DIZ DI3 DI3 10036 DI4 DI4 DI4 10037 DI5 DI5 DI5 10038 DI6 DIE DI6 Active low For the 1xxxx registers Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs F unction Code Description 02 Read input status 3xxxx Mapping Modbus Inputs The drive maps the following information to the 3xxxx Modbus addresses cal
121. ATE 1 2 2 4 4 8 38 4 57 6 76 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY 0 8N1 1 8N2 2 8E1 3 801 0 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0 ABB DRV LIM 1 DCU PROFILE 1 O ABB DRV LIM 2 ABB DRV FULL 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0 65535 1 0 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0 65535 1 0 5309 EFB STATUS 0 65535 1 O IDLE 5310 EFBPAR 10 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5311 EFB PAR 11 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5312 EFBPAR 12 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5313 EFBPAR 13 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5314 EFBPAR 14 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5315 EFBPAR 15 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5316 EFBPAR 16 0 65535 1 O NOT SEL 5317 EFBPAR 17 0 65535 1 0 NOT SEL 5318 EFBPAR 18 0 65535 1 0 5319 EFB PAR 19 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 5320 EFB PAR 20 0 0xFFFF hex 1 0 Group 81 PFC Control 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0 0 100 096 0 196 0 096 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0 0 100 096 0 196 0 096 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0 0 1000 0 1 0 0 8109 START FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 48 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 53 0 Hz 8110 START FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 48 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 53 0 Hz 8111 START FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 48 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 53 0 Hz 8112 Low FREQ 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 25 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz
122. Application Macro Alternate This macro provides an I O configuration adopted to a sequence of DI control signals used when alternating the rotation direction of the drive To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 3 ALTERNATE Connection example X1 4 SCR Signal cable shield screen Li 42 Al External frequency reference 1 0 10 V e 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 749 AGND Analog output circuit common L 410 24 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 111 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 112 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start fwd If DI1 state is the same as DI2 drive stops 14 DI2 Start reverse 15 DI3 Constant speed selection r 4416 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Ramp pair selection Activation selects 2nd acc dec ramp pair 18 DI6 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A Default operation F 21 RO1B By Ready gt 19 connected to 21 And ins ae 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A Fx Default operation D DI5 Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 Ref
123. BB Drives Profile FBA CONTROL WORD Bit Name Value Commanded Comments State 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero 7 RESET 0 21 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled 0 CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refand deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRLLOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 comm 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 15 Unused Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the status word content ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD Bit Name Value Correspond to ate oein the state diagram 0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON 0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON 1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE 0 OFF1 ACTIVE 2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED 0 OPERA
124. CS510 User s Manual This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control PFC applications To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 7 PFC CONTROL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example X1 SCR N2 lan i8 AGND Ds D D 10V Al2 AGND AO1 AO2 AGND Fe pee rsen en Tenere LE 10 24 V r 111 GND 12 DCOM 13 DI1 14 DI2 t 15 DI3 I 34 16 DI4 17 DI5 118 DI6 19 RO1C Signal cable shield screen External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID PFC 0 10 vi Analog input circuit common Note 1 Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10 V gt 0 100 Analog input circuit common PID setpoint Output frequency 0 20 mA Actual 1 PI controller actual value 0 4 20 mA Analog output circuit common Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC Auxiliary voltage output common Digital input common for all Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive Relay output 1 programmable
125. DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 2 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 2 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 3 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY Switch off delay for relay 3 See RO 1 OFF DELAY Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 81 Code Description 1410 1412 RELAY OUTPUT 4 6 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4 6 what relay output 4 6 means See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 1413 RO 4 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 4 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 4 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1415 RO 5 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 5 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 5 See RO 1 OFF DELAY 1417 RO 6 ON DELAY Defines the switch on delay for relay 6 See RO 1 ON DELAY 1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY Defines the switch off delay for relay 6 See RO 1 OFF DELAY Start Up 82 ACS510 User s Manual Group 15 Analog Outputs This group defines the drive s analog current signal outputs The drive s analog outputs can be Any parameter of the Operating Data group Group 01 Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current Scaled and or inver
126. Drive Low Voltage AC Drives User s Manual ACS510 01 Drives 1 1 110 kW Ak EP ED P EP I ACS510 Drive Manuals GENERAL MANUALS ACS510 01 User s Manual 1 1 110 kW Safety Installation Start Up EmbeddedFieldbus Fieldbus Adapter Diagnostics Maintenance Technical Data OPTION MANUALS Fieldbus Adapters I O Extension Modules etc manuals delivered with optional equipment Relay Output Extension Module typical title Installation Start Up Diagnostics Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual The Industrial wordmark and Product names in the form Drive are registered or pending trademarks of ABB CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation e V ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet Vendor Association DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User Organization Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of Schneider Automation Inc Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org Profibus DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG 2005 ABB Inc All Rights Reserved ACS510 User s Manual Safety gt PPRPPPP PP PPE Warning The ACS510 adjustable speed AC drive shoul
127. EC INIT Adapter is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive 3 CONFIG ERROR Adapter configuration error The revision code of the adapter s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in the drive s configuration file parameter 5132 5128 4 OFF LINE Adapter is off line 5 ON LINE Adapter is on line 6 RESET Adapter is performing a hardware reset 5132 FBA CPI FW REV Contains the revision of the module s CPI program Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e Zz correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5133 FBA APPL FW REV Contains the revision of the module s application program Format is xyz see parametrer 5132 Start Up 124 ACS510 User s Manual Group 53 EFB Protocol This group defines set up variables used for an embedded fieldbus EFB communication protocol The standard EFB protocol in the ACS510 is Modbus See Embedded Fieldbus starting on page 142 Code Description 5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol Format XXYY where xx protocol ID and YY program revision 5302 EFB STATION ID Defines the node address of the RS485 link The node address on each unit must be unique 5303 EFB BAUD RATE Defines the communication speed of the
128. ELER TIME 2 Undersized brake chopper if present Verify that overvoltage controller is ON using parameter 2005 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated Temperature is at or above limit R1 R4 115 C 239 F R5 R6 125 C 257 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load Diagnostics ACS510 User s Manual 197 Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action SHORT CIRC Fault current Check for and correct A short circuit in the motor cable s or motor Supply disturbances REVERSED Not used DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient Check for and correct Missing phase in the input power supply Blown fuse Undervoltage on mains AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss Analog input value is less than AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI1FLT LIMIT 3021 and 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss Analog input value is less than AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 Check for and correct Source and connection for analog input Parameter settings for AI2FLT LIMIT 3022 and 3001 AIXMIN FUNCTION MOT TEMP Motor is too hot based on either the drive s estimate or on tempera
129. ERLOCK Bit 4 0303 sTS CMD WORD 1 0304 FB STS WORD 2 0 READY ALARM 1 ENABLED REQ MAINT 2 STARTED DIRLOCK 3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK 4 ZERO SPEED CTL MODE 5 ACCELERATE Reserved 6 DECELERATE Reserved 7 AT SETPOINT Reserved 8 LIMIT Reserved 9 SUPERVISION Reserved 10 REV REF REQ CTL 11 REV ACT REQ REF1 12 PANEL LOCAL REQ REF2 13 FIELDBUS LOCAL REQ REF2EXT 14 EXT2 ACT ACK STARTINH 15 FAULT ACK OFF ILCK Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 69 0305 FAULT WORD 1 Reed only copy of the Fault Word 1 When a fault is active the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words See Fault Listing on page 196 for a description of the faults The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0306 FAULT WORD 2 Read only copy of the Fault Word 2 See parameter 0305 0307 FAULT WORD 3 Read only copy of the Fault Word 3 See parameter 0305 Bit 0305 FAULT WORD 1 0306 FAULT WORD 2 0307 FAULT WORD 3 0 OVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1 1 DCOVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB2 2 DEVOVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3 3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Incompatible software type 4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved 5 DCUNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved 6 Al1 LOSS Reserved Rese
130. FWD or REV is Steady when the motor is up to speed Flashing slowly when the motor is stopped Flashing quickly when the motor is accelerating Operating the Drive LOC REM The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the remote control REM mode and is controlled from the Control Terminal Block X1 To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press If you Press and release the display flashes LOC then the drive stops Use the Reference Mode to set the local control reference Press and hold for about 2 seconds release when the display changes from LoC to LoC r then the drive continues as before The drive copies the current remote values for run stop status and the reference and uses them as the initial local control commands To switch back to remote control REM press Start Stop To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons Start Up 38 ACS510 User s Manual Shaft direction To change the shaft direction press DIR parameter 1003 must be set to 3 REQUEST Reference See Reference Mode below Reference Mode Use the Reference Mode to set the frequency reference Normally this reference control is only possible when the drive is under Local LOC control However the drive can be set up using Group 11 Reference Select to also allow reference modification when the drive is under remote REM contro
131. Hz N689 16 5Hz 1205 CONST SPEED 4 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 20 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 20 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 22 0 Hz 1206 CONST SPEED 5 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 25 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 27 5Hz 1207 CONST SPEED 6 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 40 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 40 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 44 0 Hz Start Up 54 ACS510 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User 1208 CONST SPEED 7 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 50 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 55 0 Hz Group 13 Analogue Inputs 1301 MINIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1303 FILTER AI1 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s 1304 MINIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0 0 100 0 0 1 100 0 1306 FILTER AI2 0 0 10 0 s 0 1s 0 1s Group 14 Relay Outputs 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0 36 45 1 1 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0 36 45 1 2 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0 36 45 1 3 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1405 RO1 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1406 RO20ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1407 RO2OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s 1409 RO3 OFF DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 0 0s
132. I4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 4 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 5 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DIA Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DIG Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Free 6 Not allowed DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Fourth PFC Relay DI5 Fifth PFC Relay DI6 Sixth PFC Relay Start Up 136 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 2 DI2 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with DI2 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Free Not allowed DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI3 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI2 Speed Reg Motor DI2 First PFC Relay DI3 First PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Free DI1 Free DI
133. ID VALUES 1 MR Z EXTRA PARS 5 3401 DISP 1 SEL MISSING VALUES 7 READY SEL EXIT EDIT In the above right details screen The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes details In general the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the backup file The second item listed is the default edit For tracking purposes an asterisk initially appears by each item As edits are made the asterisks disappear 2 In the illustrated example the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz but the target drive is limited to 8 kHz 3 Press EDIT to edit the parameter The display is the target drive s standard edit screen for the selected parameter 4 Highlight the desired value for the target drive 5 Press SAVE to save setting 6 Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining exception 7 When your editing is complete press READY in the Differences List and then select Yes save parameters Download Failures In some situations the drive may be unable to accept a download In those cases the control panel display is Parameter download failed plus one of the following causes Set not found You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in the backup The remedy is to manually define the set or upload the set from a drive that has the desired set definitions
134. ID setpoint requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied analog value s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 COMM VALUE 1 Analog Output 1 controlled by IA writing to parameter 0135 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling pai pa values 1505 MAXIMUM A01 1506 FILTER A01 Filter time constant for A01 1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 COMM VALUE 2 Analog Output 2 controlled by writing to parameter 0136 0136 COMM VALUE 2 Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 181 Drive Parameter Value Description Protocol Reference 1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling us ot values 1511 MAXIMUM AO2 1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for A02 PID Control Setpoint Source Using the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops Drive Parameter Value Setting Protocol Reference 4010 SET POINT SEL Set 1 8 COMM VALUE 1 Setpoint is input reference 2 4110 SET POINT SEL Set 2 9 comm ait C77 Alt 4210 SET POINT SEL Ext Trim 10 COMM AIT Communication Fault When using fieldbus control specify the drive s actio
135. Installation 18 ACS510 User s Manual Note Terminals 3 6 and 9 are at the same potential Note For safety reasons the fault relay signals a fault when the ACS510 is powered down You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration PNP connection source NPN connection sink X1 X1 10 24 V 101424 V r 11 GND Hri GND 12 DCOM 12 DCOM 13 DI1 L13 D1 14 DI2 14 DI2 15 DI3 15 DI3 16 DI4 16 DI4 17 DI5 17 DI5 18 DIG L 18 DIG Install the Wiring Checking Motor and Motor Cable Insulation A 2 Warning Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the drive to input power For this test make sure that motor cables are NOT connected to the drive Complete motor cable connections to the motor but NOT to the drive output terminals U2 V2 W2 At the drive end of the motor cable measure the insulation resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective o Earth PE Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that ohm resistance is greater than 1 Mohm Be Installation ACS510 User s Manual 19 Wiring IP 21 Enclosure with Cables 1 Install the cable clamps for the power motor cables Open the appropriate knockouts in the conduit gland box See Conduit Gland Kit above On the input power c
136. N689 27 5Hz 8113 LOW FREQ 2 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 25 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 27 5Hz 8114 Low FREQ 3 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 25 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N688 25 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz N689 27 5Hz 8115 AUX MOT START D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 5 0s 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 1s 20 0s 8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0 6 1 1 Y 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 0 336 0 h 0 1h 0 0 h NOT SEL Y 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0 0 100 0 0 1 50 0 Start Up 62 ACS510 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 8120 INTERLOCKS 0 6 1 4 Y 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0 1 1 0 NO 8122 PFC START DELAY 0 00 10 00 s 0 01 s 0 50 s 8123 PFC ENABLE 0 2 O NOT SEL Y 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8125 DEC IN AUX START 0 0 1800 0 s 0 1s 0 0 s NOT SEL 8127 MOTORS 1 7 1 2 Group 98 Options 9802 COMM PROT SEL 0 4 1 O NOT SEL Y NOTE This parameter 1003 is not available in software option N688 and N689 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 63 Complete Parameter Descriptions This section describes the actual signals and parameters for ACS510 Some values vary depending on the drive software options This is indicated by N688 or N689 in the table below Refer to the type code on the drive namplate For example ACS510 01 N688 Term Definit
137. OPERATE CONTROL z 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently active deceleration ramp 2203 or 2205 Normal command sequence Enter OFF1 ACTIVE Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON unless other interlocks OFF2 OFF3 are active 1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF2 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop Normal command sequence Enter OFF2 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED 2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation OFF3 inactive CONTROL 0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by parameter 2208 Normal command sequence Enter OFF3 ACTIVE Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED WARNING Be sure motor and driven equipment can be stopped using this mode 3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED Note the Run OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active See 1601 If 1601 is set to COMM this bit also actives the Run Enable signal 0 OPERATION Inhibit operation Enter OPERATION INHIBITED INHIBITED 4 Unused ABB DRV LIM RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED ABB DRV FUEE 0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to Zero Drive ramps to stop current and DC voltage limits in force 5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED _ Enable ramp function Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR ACCELERATOR ENABLED 0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping Ramp Function Generator output held 6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation Enter OPERATING
138. OUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS FAULT2 store the most recent faults For fieldbus access the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value assigned and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification See table below Not all profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification For profiles that support this specification the profile documentation defines the proper fault request process Drive Fault Code IURI CON SUR od 1 OVERCURRENT 2310h 2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h 3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h 4 SHORT CIRC 2340h 5 Reserved FF6Bh 6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h 7 Al1 LOSS 8110h 8 Al2 LOSS 8110h 9 MOT TEMP 4310h 10 PANEL LOSS 5300h 11 NOT USED 12 MOTOR STALL 7121h 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 9000h 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 9001h 16 EARTH FAULT 2330h 17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah 18 THERM FAIL 5210h 19 OPEX LINK 7500h 20 OPEX PWR 5414h 21 CURR MEAS 2211h Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual Drive Fault Code ERE CON Baa S m 22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h 23 NOT USED 24 NOT USED 25 Reserved FF80h 26 DRIVE ID 5400h 27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h 29 EFB CONFIG FILE 6306h 30 FORCE TRIP FF90h 31 EFB 1 FF92h 32 EFB 2 FF93h 33 EFB 3 FF94h 34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h 35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h 36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh 101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h 102 Reserved FF55h 103 SERF MACRO FF55h 104
139. Parameter is active when 4230 TRIM MODE 0 trim mode is not active 4230 TRIM MODE Selects the type of trim if any Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference 0 NOT SEL Disables the trim function 1 PROPORTIONAL Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the Hz reference 2 DIRECT Adds a trim factor based on the control loop s maximum limit 4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier as a percent plus or minus used in the trim mode Start Up 122 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 4232 CORRECTION SRC Defines the trimming reference for the correction source 1 PID2 REF Uses appropriate REF MAX SWITCH A OR B 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is active A 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is active B 2 PID2 OUTPUT Uses the absolute maximum speed or frequency Switch C 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY Add Ramped ref gt Trimmed ref Switch Select par 4230 trim scale Mul Mul gt gt 9 Extref 1 max A p Off X X o gt M gt Ext ref 2 max B propor LI gt Abs Max Speed gt direct Select Freq C par 4232 Trimming PID2 ref PID2 ref PID 2 X Trimming PID2 out Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 123 Group 51 Ext Comm Module This group defines set up variables for a fieldbus a
140. RS485 link in kbits per second kbits s 1 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY Defines the data length parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication The same settings must be used in all on line stations 0 8N1 8 data bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive During normal operation this counter is increasing constantly 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive For high counts check Ambient electro magnetic noise levels high noise levels generate errors CRC calculations for possible errors 5308 EFB UART ERRORS Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive 5309 5310 EFB STATUS Cont
141. Reserved FF55h 105 Reserved FF55h 201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h 204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h 205 Reserved obsolete 5000h 206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h 207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h 1000 PARHZRPM 6320h 1001 PAR PFCREFNG 6320h 1002 Reserved obsolete 6320h 1003 PAR AI SCALE 6320h 1004 PARAO SCALE 6320h 1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h 1006 EXT ROMISSING 6320h 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 6320h 1008 NOT USED 1009 PAR PCU1 6320h 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h 183 Fieldbus Adapter 184 ACS510 User s Manual Drive Fault Code IBRIVECOM Dn 1013 PARPFCIO2 6320h 1014 PAR PFCIO 3 6320h 1015 PAR USER DEFIND U F Serial Communication Diagnostics Besides the drive fault codes the FBA module has diagnostic tools Refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 185 ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Overview The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including protocols available on the FBA module This section describes the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules Control Word As described earlier in Control Interface the CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile
142. SPEED 120 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ Motor Poles lt 0 992 1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete not enough relays are parameterized to PFC Or a conflict exists between Group 14 parameter 8117 NR OF AUX MOT and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete the actual number of PFC motors parameter 8127 MOTORS does not match the PFC motors in Group 14 and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete the drive is unable to allocate a digital input interlock for each PFC motor parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and 8127 MOTORS 1015 PAR USER i iori i ilj DERNED UE a defined U f ratio is not compatibility only when parameters 2605 Fault Resetting The ACS510 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults Refer to parameter Group 31 Automatic Reset Warning If an external source for start command is selected and it is active the ACS510 may start immediately after fault reset Flashing Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED Turn the power off for 5 minutes Diagnostics ACS510 User s Manual 201 Red LED To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED on not flashing correct the problem and do one of the following From the control panel Press RESET Turn the power off for 5 minutes Depending on the value of 1604 FAULT RESET SELECT the
143. Scaled Value 1 0 1 mA 1 0 1 mA 2 0 1 mA 10 0 1 10 0 196 1 Where parameters are in percent the Complete Parameter List for ACS510 section specifies what parameter corresponds to 10096 In such cases to convert from percent to engineering units multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100 and divide by 100 For example Feedback Parameter Value of the Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution integer Resolution Parameter that Value of 100 Ref 100 g defines 100 Scaled Value 10 0 1 1500 rpm 10 0 1 1500 RPM 100 15 rpm 100 0 196 500 Hz 100 0 1 500 Hz 100 50 Hz 1 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED as the 100 reference and that 9908 1500 rpm 2 Assuming for the sake of this example that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Actual Value Mapping See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 195 Diagnostics Warning Do not attempt any measurement parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual Such action will void the warranty may endanger correct operation and increase downtime and expense Warning All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service person
144. See parameter 3406 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter See parameter 3407 Start Up 110 ACS510 User s Manual Group 35 Motor Temp Meas This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault motor overheating as detected by a temperature sensor Typical connections are defined below One Sensor Three Sensors A AY P m n AI1 pi lai 1 pol ry M i ng Al Ki Ina I 1 1 D i r i otor i o E CY 1 10 nF L Warning IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts and A the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either non conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth To fulfil this requirement connect a thermistor and other similar components to the drive s control terminals using any of these alternatives Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced insulation Protect all circuits connected to the drive s digital and analog inputs Protect against contact and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit Use an external thermistor relay The relay insulation must be rated for the same voltage level as the drive s main circuit The figure belo
145. TION INHIBITED 3 TRIPPED 0 1 FAULT 0 No fault Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 187 ABB Drives Profile FBA STATUS WORD xn Name Value Correspond to sss i the state diagram 4 OFF 2 STA 1 OFF2 inactive 0 OFF2 ACTIVE 5 OFF 3 STA 1 OFF3 inactive 0 OFF3 ACTIVE 6 SWC ON INHIB 1 SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE 0 SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE 7 ALARM 1 Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm 8 AT SETPOINT 1 OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value 0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 0 Drive control location LOCAL 10 ABOVE LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision 0 Supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit Bit remains O until supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit See group 32 Supervision 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 EXT2 selected 0 External control location 1 EXT1 selected 12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received 0 No External Run Enable signal received 13 15 Unused Fieldbus Adapter 188 ACS510 User s Manual The state diagr
146. ULT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 ENABLE 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL 1 FAULT 2 CONST SP7 1 O NOT SEL 3 LAST SPEED 3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0 0 60 0 s 0 1s 10 0s 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0 0 3023 WIRING FAULT O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 Group 31 Automatic Reset 3101 NR OF TRIALS 0 5 1 5 3102 TRIAL TIME 1 0 600 0 s 0 1s 30 0s 3103 DELAY TIME 0 0 120 0 s 0 1s 6 0s 3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 3106 JAR UNDERVOLTAGE O DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 3107 AR AISMIN 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 1 1 Group 32 Supervision 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101 199 1 103 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO 0 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI 0 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101 199 1 103 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO 0 3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI 0 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101 199 1 103 3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO 0 3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI 0 Group 33 Information 3301 FW VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 Firmware version 3302 LP VERSION 0000 FFFF hex 1 0 Start Up 58 ACS510 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 3303 TEST DATE yy ww 1 0 3304 DRIVE RATING Group 34 Panel Display
147. WORD Bit5 RAMP HOLD EXT2 RAMP HOLD 00007 CONTROL WORD Bit 6 RAMP IN ZERO RUN DISABLE RAMP IN ZERO 00008 CONTROL WORD Bit 7 RESET STPMODE R RESET 00009 CONTROL WORD Bit8 N A STPMODE EM N A 00010 CONTROL WORD Bit 9 N A STPMODE C N A 00011 CONTROL WORD Bit 10 N A RAMP 2 REMOTE CMD 00012 CONTROL WORD Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP OUT 0 EXT2 00013 CONTROL WORD Bit 12 N A RAMP HOLD N A 00014 CONTROL WORD Bit 13 N A RAMP IN O N A 00015 CONTROL WORD Bit 14 N A REQ LOCALLOCK N A 00016 CONTROL WORD Bit 15 N A TORQLIM2 N A 00017 CONTROL WORD Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL CTL Does not apply 00018 CONTROL WORD Bit 17 FBLOCAL REF 00019 CONTROL WORD Bit 18 START DISABLE1 00020 CONTROL WORD Bit 19 START DISABLE2 00021 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved 00032 00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 z Active low For the Oxxxx registers Status is always readable Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control Additional relay outputs are added sequentially Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual
148. ZERO 0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to zero Embedded Fieldbus 164 ACS510 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 5319 Bit Name Value Commanded Comments State 7 RESET 0 51 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists Enter SWITCH ON INHIBITED Effective if 1604 COMM 0 OPERATING Continue normal operation 8 9 Unused 10 Unused ABB DRV LIM REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled SABE DRY FUL ig CW 0 or Ref 0 Retain last CW and Ref CW 0 and Ref 0 Fieldbus control enabled Refand deceleration acceleration ramp are locked 11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 EXT2 Effective if 1102 comm 0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 EXT1 Effective if 1102 COMM 12 Unused 15 DCU Profile The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile DCU Profile coNTROL WORD See Parameter 0301 Bit Name Value Command Req Comments 0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop mode 0 parameter or the stop mode requests bits 7 no op and 8 1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START commands 0 no op result in a stop command 2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR d with the sign of the reference aT defines direction 0 Forward direction 3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the
149. able strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the short 3 pig tail short to minimize noise radiation pa E i 8 IP2001 5 Route both cables through the clamps x pri 6 Strip and connect the power motor wires and the power ground wire to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 217 X0005 7 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen 8 Install conduit gland box and tighten the cable clamps 9 Install the cable clamp s for the control cable s 10 11 12 13 14 15 Power motor cables and clamps not shown in figure Strip control cable sheathing and twist the copper screen into a pig tail X0006 Route control cable s through clamp s and tighten clamp s Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and 1 analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive 14 end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 11 Install the conduit gland box cover 1
150. age at fault history parameter 70 rating code s ccro ee ees 9 voltage frequency ratio parameter 98 W wake up delay PID parameter 118 wake up deviation PID parameter 118 warning automatic start up 3 25 dangerous voltages 3 high temperatures sess 3 IStipig AA dot ee Nec PETER US 3 not field repairable 3 parallel control connections 3 qualified installer 3 thermistor installation 110 weight AVE cutie nS el bold sae dee AY 233 245 wiring CORON stre me pP et alanta 17 fault parameter AA 103 installation a 18 installation steps IP21 cables 19 installation steps IP21 conduit 20 installation steps IP54 cables 21 installation steps IP54 conduit 22 OVERVIEW 1c e I AUT AA A ed 13 requirements general 13 XYZ zero speed load fault parameter 101 Index AA EP ED FADED 3ABD00017199 REV A EN EFFECTIVE 05 31 2005 SUPERSEDES NONE ACS510 ABB Oy AC Drives P O Box 184 FIN 00381 HELSINKI FINLAND Telephone 358 10 22 11 Telefax 358 10 22 22681 Internet http www abb com ABB Inc Automation Technologies Drives amp Machines 16250 West Glendale Drive New Berlin WI 53151 USA Telephone 1 262 785 3200 1 800 HELP 365
151. ains the status of the EFB protocol 0 IDLE EFB protocol is configured but not receiving any messages 1 EXEC INIT EFB protocol is initializing 2 TIME OUT A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol 3 CONFIG ERROR EFB protocol has a configuration error 4 OFF LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive 5 ON LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive 6 RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset 7 LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen only mode EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40005 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 125 Code Description 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus Register 40012 5318 EFB PAR 18 Reserved 5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Con
152. air cable Use one individually shielded pair for each signal Do not use a common return for different analog signals Digital Cables Recommendation for digital signal runs A double shielded cable is the best alternative but single shielded twisted multi pair cable is also usable Control Panel Cable If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable use only Category 5 Patch ethernet cable The maximum length that is tested to meet EMC specifications is 3 m 9 8 ft Longer cables are susceptible to electromagnetic noise and must be user tested to verify that EMC requirements are met Where long runs are required especially for runs longer than about 12 m 40 ft use a RS232 RS485 converter at each end and run RS485 cable Drive s Control Connection Terminals The following table provides specifications for the drive s control terminals Control Frame Size Maximum Wire Size Torque mm AWG Nm lb ft All 1 5 16 0 4 0 3 Efficiency Approximately 98 at nominal power level Cooling Cooling Specifications Method Internal fan flow direction from bottom to top Free space above and below the ACS510 drive 200 mm 8 in Requirement Free space is not required on the drive s sides ACS510 units can be mounted side by side Air Flow 380 480 Volt Drives The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380 480 Volt drives D
153. al ACS510 01 124A 4 ACS510 01 157A 4 ACS510 01 180A 4 ACS510 01 195A 4 R6 100 m 330 ft Internal Note 1 100m 330ft Note 1 Internal Note 2 Note 2 1 additional filter 2 Data not available at time of publication For any motor cable length up to the100 m maximum length limit compliance does not require an A Warning Do not use RFI EMC filters in a floating or impedance grounded network For EN 61800 3 First Environment Unrestricted Distribution CISPR11 Class B compliance with conducted emission limits all drives require an additional external RFI EMC filter and cable lengths are limited as specified in the table below The RFI EMC filters are separate options and installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 223 Note The filter does not assure compliance with radiated emissions limits Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800 3 CE First Environment Unrestricted Distribution CISPR11 Class B Compliance Conducted Emissions Only Drive Type Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 2606 1 or 4 8 kHz 2606 8 Max Length RFI EMC Filter Max Length RFI EMC Filter ACS510 01 060A 4 ACS510 01 072A 4 ACS510 01 03A3 4 R1 10 m 33 ft 10 m 33 ft ACS510 01
154. al Derating The load capacity current and power decreases for certain situations as defined below In such situations where full motor power is required oversize the drive so that the derated value provides sufficient capacity For example if your application requires 15 4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz switching frequency calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows The minimum size required 15 4 A 0 80 19 25 A Where 0 80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency see Switching Frequency Derating below Referring to loy in the ratings tables page 210 the following drives exceed the lon requirement of 19 25 A ACS510 01 025A 4 Temperature Derating In the temperature range 40 C 50 C 104 F 122 F the rated output current is decreased 1 for every 1 C 1 8 F above 40 C 104 F The output current is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor Example If the ambient temperature is 50 C 122 F the derating factor is 100 1 C x 10 C 90 or 0 90 The output current is then 0 90 x hy Altitude Derating In altitudes from 1000 2000 m 3300 13 200 ft above sea level the derating is 196 for every 100 m 330 ft If the installation site is higher than 2000 m 6600 ft above sea level please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information Switching Frequency Derating If the 8 kHz switchi
155. al 73 Group 11 Reference Select This group defines How the drive selects between command sources Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2 Code Description 1101 KEYPAD REF SEL Selects the reference controlled in local control mode 1 REF1 Hz Frequency reference as hertz 2 REF2 Reference as percentage 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2 Thus defines the source for Start Stop Direction commands and reference signals 0 EXT1 Selects external control location 1 EXT1 See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1 s reference definitions 1 DI1 Assigns control to EXT or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 D11 activated EXT2 DI1 de activated EXT1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input See DI1 above 7 EXT2 Selects external control location 2 EXT2 See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2 s Start Stop Dir definitions See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2 s reference definitions 8 COMM Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control word Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 parameter 0301 defines the active external control location EXT1 or EXT2 See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1
156. alue Where e C Main Reference value COMM for values 9 10 and AI1 for values 14 17 e B Correcting reference AM for values 9 10 and Al2 for values 14 17 Example The figure shows the reference source curves for value settings 9 10 and 14 17 where e C 25 e P 4012 SETPOINT MIN O P 4013 SETPOINT MAX 0 B varies along the horizontal axis Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 75 1104 REF1 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference 1 The minimum analog input signal as a percent of the full signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 P7105 su eee MIN in Hz MAX Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal These parameters reference and analog min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the reference P 1104 A Extref 1105 1106 REF1 MAX MIN Analog l l l l l l l l input signal Sets the maximum for external reference 1 P 1301 The maximum analog input signal as a percent of or 1304 full the signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Ext ref sets the maximum analog input signal A P 1104 MIN P1105 _ MAX P 1302 or 1305 Analog P 1301 or 1304 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2 0 17 Same as
157. am below describes the start stop function of CONTROL WORD CW and STATUS WORD SW bits From any state Emergency Stop OFF3 CW Bit2 0 baie OFF3 SW Bit5 0 Aer From any state From any state Emergency Off OFF2 CW Bit1 0 Faul OFF2 FAULT SW Bit3 1 ACTIVE SW Bit4 0 eur OM CW Bit7 1 n f 0 I ae Ng L L From any state OFF1 CW Bit0 0 MAINS OFF See SW Bit6 1 tamaan I SW Bit1 0 OFF1 INHIBITED ACTIVE n f 0 1120 Power ON CW Bit0 0 L AB CD NOT READY ae TO SWITCH ON SW Bit0 0 CW Bit3 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110 pos OPERATION READY TO n UBI INHIBITED SWITCH ON PB OPERATION INHIBITED CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x111 L BCD READY TO a4 OPERATE NCBI CW Bit4 0 CW Bit3 1 and gt SW Bit12 1 OPERATION C D ENABLED SW Bit2 1 ae A lt CW Bit5 0 CW xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111 L RFG OUTPUT D ENABLED E B KEV eet CW xxxx x1 xx xx11 1111 L State mm State change CW CONTROL WORD SW STATUS WORD RFG Ramp Function Generator Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ n Speed RFG ACCELERATOR ENABLED C 1 CW xxxx X1xx x111 1111 OPERATING SW Bit8 1 D d Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual Reference 189 As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE word is a frequency reference Reference Scaling The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile ABB Drives Profi
158. and the control panel Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Connect using either Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 A Fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx PT Two basic serial communications configurations are available Embedded fieldbus EFB Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1 28 32 on the control board a control system can communicate with the drive using the Modbus protocol For protocol and profile descriptions see Modbus Protocol Technical Data and ABB Control Profiles Technical Data later in this section Fieldbus adapter FBA See Fieldbus Adapter on page 174 Control Interface In general the basic control interface between Modbus and the drive consists of Output words Control Word Reference1 Reference2 nput words Status Word Actual value 1 Actual value 2 Actual value 3 Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 143 Planning Actual value 4 Actual value 5 Actual value 6 Actual value 7 Actual value 8 The content of these words is defined by profiles For details on the profiles used see ABB Control Profiles Technical Data on page 162 Note The words output and input are used as seen from the fieldbus controller point
159. anual provided with the FBA module Status Word As described earlier in Control Interface the contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station For specific STATUS WORD content see the user s manual provided with the FBA module Reference As described earlier in Control Interface the REFERENCE word is a frequency reference Note REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles Reference Scaling REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific However at the drive the meaning of a 100 REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below For a detailed description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE see the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Generic Profile Reference Range ERAN Scaling Remarks ype REF Fieldbus Frequency 100 par 9907 Final reference limited by specific 1104 1105 100 par 9907 Actual motor speed limited by 2007 2008 frequency Actual Values As described earlier in Control Interface Actual Values are words containing drive values Fieldbus Adapter 194 Actual Value Scaling ACS510 User s Manual For Actual Values scale the feedback integer using the parameter s resolution See Complete Parameter List for ACS510 section for parameter resolutions For example Feedback Parameter Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Integer Resolution
160. arly the derivative is a constant added to the PID controller output The error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter The time constant of the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative part of the PID controller output gt t 0 1 10 0 Derivation time seconds PID output n D part of controller output Gain P 401 P 4003 gt 4004 PID DERIV FILTER Defines the filter time constant for the error derivative part of the PID controller output e Before being added to the PID controller output the error derivative is filtered with a 1 pole filter Increasing the filter time smooths the error derivative reducing noise 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the error derivative filter 0 1 10 0 Filter time constant seconds 4005 4006 ERROR VALUE INV Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed 0 NO Normal a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed Error Ref Fbk 1 YES Inverted a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed Error Fbk Ref UNITS Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values PID1 parameters 0128 0130 and 0132 See parameter 3405 for list of available units 4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values Sates REPE luna Enter the decimal point location counting in from the
161. ated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME value 3021 Al1 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 1 See 3001 AI lt MIN FUNCTION 3022 Al2 FAULT LIMIT Sets a fault level for analog input 2 See 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 103 Code Description 3023 WIRING FAULT Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running When the drive is not running it monitors for Improper connections of input power to the drive output the drive can display fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING if improper connections are detected Ground faults the drive can display fault 16 EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected Also see parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 0 DISABLE No drive response to either of the above monitoring results 1 ENABLE The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems Start Up 104 ACS510 User s Manual Group 31 Automatic Reset This group defines conditions for automatic resets An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is detected The drive holds for a set delay time then automatically restarts You can limit the number of resets in a specified time period and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults 3105 3106 3107 Code Description 3101 INR OF TRIALS Example Three faults have occurred in Sets the number of all
162. ated motor P 8119 3PFC e Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor 3PFC 1 Increments the starting order counter to change the 4PFC starting order for the motors 2PFC Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated t motor 1PFC Ng Switches off the above motor s contactor if the motor was aa P 8122 running Any other running motors are not interrupted Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated motor The autochange switchgear connects this motor to the ACS510 power output A Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFC START DELAy autochange not allowed Starts the speed regulated motor B Autochange occurs Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation 1PFC etc PID output associated with each motor Switches the above motor on but only if the new speed regulated motor had been running as a constant speed motor This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange Continues with normal PFC operation Starting Order Counter Output The operation of the starting order counter frequency No aux tau 2 aux The relay output parameter definitions 1401 1403 and motors motor motors 1410 1412 establish the initial motor sequence The lowest fax E parameter number with a value 31 PFC identifies the relay connected to 1PFC the first motor and so on Initially 1PFC speed regulated mot
163. ault 2 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Two analog references Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Speed Start stop hand auto DI1 6 Analog output AO2 Current J1 Sire o Al1 0 10 V Direction hand auto DI2 5 Relay output 1 Ready z Control location selection DI3 Relay output 2 Running 3 P AI2 0 4 20 mA Run enable DIA Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 47 Application Macro PID Control This macro provides parameter settings for closed loop control systems such as pressure control flow control etc To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 6 PID CTRL Note Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example x1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 2 AM External ref 1 Manual or Ext ref 2 PID 0 10 vi Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common Note 1 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual 0 10 V gt freq reference D 5 AI2 Actual signal PID 0 20 mA PID 0 10 V gt 0 100 PID 6 AGND Analog input circuit common setpoint D 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA ro 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA j 9 AGND Analog output
164. ault code 198 OPEX power fault code 198 options parameter group 141 output frequency data parameter 65 output voltage data parameter 65 output wiring fault code 199 overcurrent automatic reset parameter 104 fault code 196 overvoltage control enable parameter 91 P panel display variables parameter group 108 panel loss fault code 197 parameter analog input scale fault code 200 analog output scale fault code 200 change lock iore rue toman aaa e ETE SS 84 descriptions 63 external relay output fault code 200 fieldbus fault code 200 hz rpm fault code 199 listing ranges resolutions defaults 51 PCU 1 power control unit fault code 183 184 200 PCU 2 power control unit fault code 200 PFC mode fault code 197 200 PFC ref neg fault code 199 restore Assistant panel 32 restore Basic panel 39 save changes eee eee 85 parameters mode Assistant panel 30 parameters mode Basic panel 38 PE earth earth fault parameter 102 PE earth connection terminal size naana 217 LOPQUG cos AA AA 217 PFC acceleration time parameter 140 aux motor
165. ay DI4 DI6 Free DI5 DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 3 DI1 DI2 Free DI1 DI2 Free DI3 Speed Reg Motor DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Third PFC Relay DIG Free 4 Not allowed DI1 DI2 Free DI3 First PFC Relay DI4 Second PFC Relay DI5 Third PFC Relay DI6 Fourth PFC Relay 5 6 Not allowed Not allowed 4 DI4 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D14 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 with value 31 PFC The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 DI3 Free Not allowed DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI5 DI6 Free 1 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay Di5 First PFC Relay DI5 DI6 Free DI6 Free 2 DI1 DI3 Free DI1 DI3 Free DI4 Speed Reg Motor DI4 First PFC Relay Di5 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay DI6 Second PFC Relay DI6 Free 3 Not allowed DI1 DI3 Free DI4 First PFC Relay DI5 Second PFC Relay
166. bits No parity one stop bit 1 8N2 8 data bits No parity two stop bits 2 8E1 8 data bits Even parity one stop bit 3 801 8 data bits Odd parity one stop bit 1 2 kbits s 19 2 kbits s 2 4 kbits s 38 4 kbits s 4 8 kbits s 57 6 kbits s 9 6 kbits s 76 8 kbits s 5304 EFB PARITY When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is 1 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE Selects the communication profile used by the EFB protocol 0 ABB DRV LIM Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS400 1 DCU PROFILE Operation of Control Status Words conforms to 32 bit DCU Profile 2 ABB DRV FULL Operation of Control Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile as used in ACS600 800 When this protocol is selected the default value for this parameter is O Note After any changes to the communication settings the protocol must be reactivated by either cycling the drive power or by clearing and then restoring the station Id 5302 Embedded Fieldbus 146 ACS510 User s Manual Activate Drive Control Functions EFB Controlling the Drive Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sect
167. ble clamp e mmm 5 Connect the network cable to the module s network connector 6 Tighten the cable clamp 7 Install the conduit box cover 1 screw 8 For configuration information see the following X00302 Communication Set up FBA below Activate Drive Control Functions FBA on page 178 The protocol specific documentation provided with the module Fieldbus Adapter 178 ACS510 User s Manual Communication Set up FBA Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication use parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL Set 9802 4 EXT FBA Serial Communication Configuration Setting 9802 together with mounting a particular FBA module automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Parameter 5101 is automatically configured Parameters 5102 5126 are protocol dependent and define for example the profile used and additional I O words These parameters are referred to as the fieldbus configuration parameters See the user s manual provided with the FBA module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102 5126 If parameter 5127 is not used changes to parameters 5102 5126 take affect only after the drive power is cycled Parameters 5128 5133 p
168. cale defined by par 4006 and 0 196 40 0 4007 4012 SETPOINT MIN 500 0 500 0 0 1 0 0 4013 SETPOINT MAX 500 0 500 0 0 1 100 0 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 59 Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 4014 FBK SEL 1 10 1 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER 32 768 32 767 0 not used 0 001 0 4016 ACT1 INPUT 1 5 2 Y 4017 ACT2 INPUT 1 5 2 Y 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM 1000 1000 1 0 4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM 1000 1000 1 100 4022 SLEEP SELECTION 0 7 1 6 0 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz 0 0 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0 0 3600 0 s 0 1s 60 0 s 4025 WAKE UP DEV Unit and scale defined by par 4006 and 1 4007 4026 WAKE UP DELAY 0 60s 0 01s 0 50s 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 6 11 1 0 Group 41 Process PID Set 2 4101 GAIN 0 1 100 0 1 2 5 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 0 0s NOT SEL 0 1 3600 s 0 1s 3 0s 4103 DERIVATION TIME 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 0 0s 4104 PID DERIV FILTER 0 0 10 0s 0 1s 1 0s 4105 ERROR VALUE INV 0 NO 1 YES 0 4106 UNITS 0 31 4 4107 UNIT SCALE 0 4 1 1 4108 0 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 196 0 096 4107 4109 10096 VALUE Unit and scale defined by par 4106 and 0 1
169. cept as noted the following ABB Drives Profile descriptions apply to both implementations DCU Profile The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits and is the internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment Control Word The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive The drive switches between states according to the bit coded instructions in the CONTROL WORD Using the CONTROL WORD requires that The drive is in remote REM control The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling commands set using parameters such as 1001 ExT1 COMMANDS 1002 ExT2 COMMANDS and 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control profile For example to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL requires both parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL 7 1 STD MODBUS and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 ABB DRV FULL Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile 163 ABB Drives Profile CONTROL WORD See Parameter 5319 Bit Name Value commanded Comments State 0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO
170. cess PID set 1 PID1 parameters 4001 4021 Code Description 4201 4221 4228 4229 See 4001 4021 ACTIVATE Defines the source for enabling the external PID function Requires 4230 TRIM MODE 0 NOT SEL 0 NOT SEL Disables external PID control 1 Di1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input enables external PID control De activating the digital input disables external PID control 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 above 7 DRIVE RUN Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the start command drive is running enables external PID control 8 ON Defines the power on as the control for enabling external PID control Activating power to the drive enables external PID control 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control Activating the digital input disables external PID control De activating the digital input enables external PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control See DI1 INV above OFFSET Defines the offset for the PID output When PID is activated output starts from this value When PID is deactivated output resets to this value
171. circuit common 10124 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control 15 DI3 Constant speed selection 1 Not used in PID control 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 2 Not used in PID control 17 DI5 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 418 DI6 Start Stop PID Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A AX Default operation Note 2 Code 21 lRO4B H Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable DI3TDIA Output 23 RO2A fr Default operation 0 10 Reference through AT 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 1 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 1202 Benes Kos daro OU programmable 0 T CONSTANT SPEED 2 1203 1 efault operation 27 RO3B 1 Fault 1 2528 connsdisd4oo2 L SONSTANT SPEED F 1209 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed Actual value Al2 Analog output AO2 Current J1 Start stop hand PID D11 6 Relay output 1 Ready Q B A 0 10V EXT1 EXT2 selection D12 Relay output 2 Running 3 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 3 Fault 1 Runenable DI5 Start Up 48 Application Macro PFC A
172. d ONLY be installed by a qualified electrician Warning Even when the motor is stopped dangerous voltage is present at the Power Circuit terminals U1 V1 W1 and U2 V2 W2 and depending on the frame size UDC and UDC or BRK and BRK Warning Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected After disconnecting the supply wait at least 5 minutes to let the intermediate circuit capacitors discharge before removing the cover Warning Even when power is removed from the input terminals of the ACS510 there may be dangerous voltage from external sources on the terminals of the relay outputs RO01 R03 Warning When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected in parallel the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken from a single source which can either be one of the units or an external supply Warning The ACS510 01 is not a field repairable unit Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning unit contact the factory or your local Authorized Service Center for replacement Warning The ACS510 will start up automatically after an input voltage interruption if the external run command is on Warning The heat sink may reach a high temperature See Technical Data on page 210 Warning If the drive will be used in a floating network remove screws at EM1 and EMS Frame size R1 R4 or F1 and F2 Frame size R5 or R6 See diagrams on page 15 and page 16 respectively Also see Unsy
173. damage to the contacts Df PFC with Autochange mode Start Up 134 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Sets an upper limit as a percent of output capacity for the autochange logic When the output from the PID PFC control block exceeds this limit autochange is prevented For example use this parameter to deny autochange when the Pump Fan system is operating near maximum capacity Autochange Overview The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system At each autochange operation A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACS510 output the speed regulated motor e The starting order of the other motors rotates The Autochange function requires External switchgear for changing the drive s output power connections e Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS value gt O Autochange is performed when The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV The PFC input is below the level set by this parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Note The ACS510 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed In an autochange the Autochange function does all of the PID Output following see figure A 4PFC e Initiates a change when the running time since the last 100 autochange reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV and PFC 2PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL Stops the speed regul
174. dapter FBA communication module For more information on these parameters refer to the user s manual supplied with the FBA module Code Description 5101 FBA TYPE Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module 0 NOT DEFINED Module not found or not properly connected or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 EXT FBA 1 PROFIBUS DP 16 INTERBUS 21 LONWORKS 32 CANOPEN 37 DEVICENET 64 MODBUS PLUS 101 CONTROLNET 5102 5126 FB PAR 2 FB PAR 26 Refer to communication module documentation for more information on these parameters 5127 FBA PAR REFRESH Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings After refreshing the value reverts automatically to DONE 5128 FILE CPI FW REV Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter configuration file Format is xyz where x major revision number e y minor revision number e Zz correction number Example 107 revision 1 07 5129 FILE CONFIG ID Displays the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module s configuration file identification File configuration information is drive application program dependent 5130 FILE CONFIG REV Contains the revision of the drive s fieldbus adapter module configuration file Example 1 revision 1 5131 FBA STATUS Contains the status of the adapter module 0 IDLE Adapter not configured 1 EX
175. de is active Drive runs at preset speed Drive ignores all keypad commands Drive ignores all commands from communication links Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation deactivation Drive displays alarm message 2020 OVERRIDE MODE Following faults are ignored 3 DEVICE OVERTEMP 5 OVERLOAD 6 DC UNDERVOLT 7 Al1 LOSS 8 Al2 LOSS 9 MOTOR TEMP 10 PANEL LOSS 12 MOTOR STALL 14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 17 UNDERLOAD 18 THERM FAIL 21 CURR MEAS 22 SUPPLY PHASE 28 SERIAL 1 ERR 29 EFB CONFIG FILE 30 FORCE TRIP 31 EFB 1 32 EFB2 33 EFB 3 34 MOTOR PHASE 1001 PAR PFC REFNEG 1002 PAR PFC IOCONF Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 89 1003 PAR Al SCALE 1004 PAR AO SCALE 1006 PAR EXTROMISSING 1007 PAR FBUSMISSING Commissioning the override mode 1 CA d ees Enter the parameters in all groups as needed except group 17 Select the digital input that will activate override mode P1701 Enter the frequency reference for override mode P1702 Enter the pass code P1704 358 Enable the override mode P1705 Changing the override parameters 1 If override mode is already enabled disable it Enter the pass code P1704 Disable the override mode P1705 2 If needed load the override parameter set P9902 3 Change the parameters as needed except group 17 4 Change
176. e switching frequency Noise smoothing distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise intensity The random component has an average of 0 Hz and is added to the switching frequency set by parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 12 kHz 0 DISABLE 1 ENABLE 2610 USER U1 This parameter define the output voltage reference in Volts at P2611 USER F1 Please see parmeter 2605 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 99 Code Description 2611 USER F1 Frequency in Hz at which output voltage reference is P2610 USER U1 Please see parmeter 2605 2612 USER U2 This parameter define the output voltage reference in Volts at P2613 USER F2 Please see parmeter 2605 2613 USER F2 Frequency in Hz at which output voltage reference is P2612 USER U2 Please see parmeter 2605 2614 USER U3 This parameter define the output voltage reference in Volts at P2615 USER F3 Please see parmeter 2605 2615 USER F3 Frequency in Hz at which output voltage reference is P2614 USER U3 Please see parmeter 2605 2616 USER U4 This parameter define the output voltage reference in Volts at P2617 USER F4 Please see parmeter 2605 2617 USER F4 Frequency in Hz at which output voltage reference is P2616 USER U4 Please see parmeter 2605 2618 FW VOLTAGE
177. e that continued operation is safe when the analog input signal is lost PANEL COMM ERR Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error 1 FAULT Displays a fault 10 PANEL LOSS and the drive coasts to stop 2 CONST SP7 Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7 3 LAST SPEED Displays a warning 2008 PANEL LOSS and sets speed using the last operating level This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds Warning If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED make sure that continued operation is safe when the control panel communication is lost 3003 3004 3005 3006 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault 0 NOT SEL External fault signal is not used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input Activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input De activating the digital input indicates a fault The drive displays a fault 14 EXT FAULT 1 and the drive coasts to stop 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the external fault input e See DI1 INV above EXTERNAL FAULT
178. ection control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST is through digital input DI5 DI5 activated Reverse de activated Forward 8 KEYPAD Control Panel Start Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active Direction control requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 9 DI1F 2R Start Stop Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations Start forward DI1 activated and DI2 de activated Start reverse DI1 de activated and DI2 activated Stop both DI1 and DI2 activated or both de activated Requires parameter 1003 3 REQUEST 10 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start stop and direction commands Bits 0 1 2 of Command Word 1 parameter 0301 activates the start stop and direction commands See Fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions Start Up 72 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS Defines external control location 2 EXT2 the configuration of start stop and direction commands See parameter 1001 ExT1 COMMANDS above 1003 DIRECTION Defines the control of motor rotation direction 1 FORWARD Rotation is fixed in the forward direction 2 REVERSE Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction 3 REQUEST Rotation direction can be changed on command Note This parameter is not available in software option N688 and N689 Start Up ACS510 User s Manu
179. ed Regulator by pass control provides a simple control mechanism without a PID regulator Use Regulator by pass control only in special f applications OUT 4 0 No Disables Regulator by pass control The drive fMAX uses the normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT 1 YES Enables Regulator by pass control The process PID regulator is bypassed Actual value of PID is used as the PFC reference P 8110 input Normally ExT REF2 is used as the PFC P 8109 reference The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK SEL or 4114 for the PFC frequency reference P 8113 The figure shows the relation between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL OR 4114 and the speed P 8112 regulated motor s frequency in a three motor system fMin Example In the diagram below the pumping station s P 4014 outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow A lt A B C 96 A No auxiliary motors running B One auxiliary motor running C Two auxiliary motors running Mains 3 3 Contactors 3 3 ACS510 P1 P2 Outlet Pipe1 Outlet Pipe2 Inlet Pipe Outlet Pipe3 8122 PFC START DELAY Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system Using the delay the drive works as follows Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor connecting the motor to the ACS510 power output e Delays motor start for the time 812
180. ed cable details see Motor Cable Requirements for CE Compliance below Grounding See Ground Connections in Input Power Connections above For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be minimized see Effective Motor Cable Screens below Drive s Motor Connection Terminals The drive s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications See Drive s Power Connection Terminals above Motor Cable Requirements for CE Compliance The requirements in this section apply for CE compliance Minimum Requirement CE The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield however a symmetrical constructed PE conductor is always recommended The following figure shows the minimum requirement for the motor cable screen for example MCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Copper Wire Screen Helix of Copper Tape Inner Insulation able Core Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 221 Recommendation for Conductor Layout The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables Recommended CE Allowed CE Symmetrical shielded cable three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is lt 50 of the symmetrically constructed PE conductor and a conductivity of the phase conduc
181. ed securely Space around the drive meets the drive s specifications for cooling The motor and driven equipment are ready for start For floating networks The internal RFI filter is disconnected screws EM1 amp EM3 or F1 amp F2 The drive is properly grounded The input power mains voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage The input power mains connections at U1 V1 and W1 are connected and tightened as specified The input power mains fuses are installed The motor connections at U2 V2 and W2 are connected and tightened as specified The motor cable is routed away from other cables NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable The control connections are connected and tightened as specified NO tools or foreign objects such as drill shavings are inside the drive NO alternate power source for the motor such as a bypass connection is connected no voltage is applied to the output of the drive Installation 24 Re install Cover IP 21 1 Align the cover and slide it on 2 Tighten the captive screw 3 Re install the control panel IP 54 1 2 Align the cover and slide it on Tighten the captive screws around the edge of the cover R1 R4 Slide the hood down over the top of the cover R1 R4 Install the two screws that attach the hood Install the control panel ACS510 User s Manual
182. ed whenever the supervised parameter goes above the active limit Case B Parameter 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 UNDER Initially the relay is energized It is de energized whenever the supervised parameter goes below the active limit SUPERV 1 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above SUPERV 1 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above SUPERV 2 PARAM Selects the second supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV LO x HI Note Case LO lt HI represents a normal hysteresis Value of supervised parameter A HI 3203 Lo 3202 4 Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 0 LO gt HI Note Case LO gt HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits Value of Supervised Parameter Lo 3202 HI 3203 Case A Energized 1 0 Case B Energized 1 0 1 PARAM above A Active Limit A oe ae a UI ILL t gt 3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above 3206 3207 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above SUPERV 3 PARAM Selects the third supervised parameter See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above
183. eed 3 1204 8 DI2 3 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI2 e See above DI1 2 INV for code 9 DI3 4 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 e See above DI1 2 INv for code 10 DI4 5 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and DI5 See above DI1 2 INv for code 11 DI5 6 INV Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI5 and DI6 See above DI1 2 INv for code 12 DI1 2 3 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 DI2 and DI3 Inverse operation uses three digital inputs as defined below O DI de activated 1 DI activated DI DIZ DIZ Function 1 1 1 No constant speed 0 1 1 Constant speed 1 1202 1 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 0 0 1 Constant speed 3 1204 1 1 0 Constant speed 4 1205 0 1 0 Constant speed 5 1206 1 0 O Constant speed 6 1207 O O 0 Constant speed 7 1208 13 DI3 4 5 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 DI4 and DI5 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 14 DI4 5 6 INV Selects one of seven Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 DI5 and DI6 e See above DI1 2 3 INV for code 1202 CONST SPEED 1 Sets value for Constant Speed 1 The range depend on software option type e Standare software 0 500 HZ e N688 0 50 HZ e N689 0 55 HZ
184. eference analog input corrections 74 corrections for parameter values 74 keypad control parameter 73 maximum parameters 75 minimum parameters 75 select source parameter 73 select parameter group 73 speed frequency control Assistant panel 30 reference scaling EFB ABB drives profile 171 FBA ABB drives profile 189 FBA generic profile 193 reference step PFC parameters 130 regulator by pass control parameter 139 relative humidity environment limit 234 shipping limit 234 relay output activation condition parameters 79 off delay parameters 80 on delay parameters 80 parameter group 222000050 79 status data parameter 66 relays specifications A 228 remote control a 29 remove COVER s luci EL NGA abala 11 reset automatic analog input less than min parameter 104 delay time parameter 104 external fault parameter 104 number of trials parameter 104 overcurrent parameter 104 parameter group trial time parameter 104 undervoltage parameter 104 res
185. eferences are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD 2 REVERSE Max Ref Fieldbus Resultant Ref Reference 1 63 1 00 Fieldbus 163 100 163 Resultant Ref 100 163 100 Reference i i l l l l l l l l Max Ref 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Max Ref Resultant Ref Fieldbus 163 Reference Max Ref 100 163 This parameter is not available in software option N688 and N689 Embedded Fieldbus 174 ACS510 User s Manual Fieldbus Adapter Overview The ACS510 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS510 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Becontrolled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs and the control panel Fieldbus Controller Fieldbus Other Devices Connect using either r1 Standard embedded fieldbus EFB at terminals X1 28 32 A Fieldbus adapter FBA module mounted in slot 2 option Rxxx PT
186. eldbus 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4 1606 LOCAL LOCK 8 COMM Source for local lock selection is Does not 40031 bit 14 the fieldbus apply 1607 PARAM SAVE 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to 41607 memory then value returns to 0 1608 START ENABLE 1 7 COMM Source for start enable 1 is the Does not 40032 bit 2 fieldbus Command word apply 1609 START ENABLE 2 7 COMM Source for start enable 2 is the 40032 bit 3 fieldbus Command word 2201 ACC DEC 1 2 SEL 7 COMM Source for ramp pair selection is 40031 bit 10 the fieldbus Embedded Fieldbus 148 ACS510 User s Manual Relay Output Control Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied binary coded relay command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 COMM Relay Output 1 controlled 40134 bit 0 or 00033 by fieldbus 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 35 COMM Relay Output 2 controlled 40134 bit 1 or 00034 by fieldbus 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 35 COMM Relay Output 3 controlled 40134 bit 2 or 00035 by fieldbus 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 35 COMM Relay Output 4 controlled 40134 bit 3 or 00036 Note 1 by fieldbus 1411 RELAY OUTPUT 5
187. eleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off auxiliary motor Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22 Accel Decel applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time 8125 DEC IN AUX START Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum to zero frequency ramp This PFC deceleration ramp e Applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary motor is switched on Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL Applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary motor Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL DECEL applies 0 NOT SEL 0 1 1800 Activates this function using the value entered as the deceleration time Aux Motor dob mmu Ind as RE 0 A 7 speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 parameters 2202 or 2205 B speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 parameters 2203 or 2206 At aux motor start speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START At aux motor stop speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors maximum 7 motors 1 speed regulated 6 connected direct on li
188. ent Y 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER _ 0 2 3 0 P 0 1 kW 1 0 Ph Y Group 01 Operating Data 0102 SPEED 0 30000 rpm 1 rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 0104 CURRENT 0 2 0 l2s 0 1A 0105 TORQUE 200 0 200 0 0 1 0106 POWER 2 0 2 0 P 0 1 kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 2 5 Van 1V 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 2 0 Vgn 1V 0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 0 150 0 C 0 1 C 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0 0 500 0 Hz 0 1 Hz N688 0 0 50 0 Hz N689 0 0 55 0 Hz 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0 0 100 0 0 1 0113 CTRL LOCATION 0 local 1 ext1 2 ext2 1 0114 RUN TIME R 0 9999 h 1h Oh 0115 KWH COUNTER R 0 9999 kWh 1 kWh 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0 0 100 0 0 1 0118 Di 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0119 Di 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0120 Al 0 0 100 096 0 196 0121 A2 0 0 100 096 0 196 0122 RO 1 3 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0123 RO 4 6 STATUS 000 111 0 7 decimal 1 0124 Ao1 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA 0125 Ao2 0 0 20 0 mA 0 1 mA Start Up 52 ACS510 User s Manual Code Name Range Resolution Default User S 0126 PiD 1 OUTPUT 1000 0 1000 0 0 1 0127 PiD 2 OUTPUT 100 0 100 0 0 1 0128 PID 1 SETPNT Unit and scale defined by par 4
189. epe as 48 49 PID control 47 main menu control panel Assistant 30 mains see input power maintenance capacitors 208 control panel a 209 hieat sinK seges viele mea MINA ens 206 internal enclosure fan 208 intervals maaawa daks elie d rm adda 206 main fan llle 207 man als 2 segs pace ad ale Pe e e 2 mapping actual value FBA generic profile 194 EFB modbus e a EES EAT 155 materials 235 maximum frequency parameter 91 minimum frequency parameter 91 Index 242 modbus EFB addressing convention 155 ERB COIS hk naaa Ier Ng 155 EFB discrete inputs 157 EFB holding registers 158 EFB input registers 158 EFB mapping details 155 EFB mapping summary 155 EFB supported features 154 EFB technical data 154 motor changing rotation 25 checking insulation aa 18 compatibility 0 eee eee 9 connection specifications 219 load curve break point frequency 101 load curve max fault parameter 101 load curve zero speed load 101 nominal current parameter 63 nominal frequency parameter 63 nominal power parameter 64 nominal speed parameter 63 no
190. er Group 34 the middle of the LCD display can be configured to display Upto three parameter values By default the display shows three parameters 0103 OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE Use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 to display Entering parameter 0100 results in no parameter displayed For example if 3401 0100 and 3415 0100 then only the parameter specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You can also scale each parameter in the display for example to convert the motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified by 3401 parameters 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc A bar graph rather than any of the parameter values Enable bar graph displays using parameters 3404 3411 and 3418 Bottom The bottom of the LCD display shows Lower corners show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys Operating the Drive LOC REM The very first time the drive is powered up it is in the remote control REM mode and is controlled from the Control Terminal Block X1 To switch to local control LOC and control the drive using the control panel press and hold the button until first LOCAL CONTROL or later LOCAL KEEP RUN is displayed Start Up 30 ACS510 User s Manual Release the button while LOCAL CONTROL is displayed to set the
191. er Sets During a change the drive will not start Note Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings or performing a motor identification Whenever the power is cycled or parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO is changed the drive loads the last settings saved Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost Note The value of this parameter 1605 is not included in the User Parameter Sets and does not change if User Parameter Sets change Note You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2 See parameter 1401 0 NOT SEL Defines the control panel using parameter 9902 as the only control for changing User Parameter Sets 1 DI 1 Defines digital input D11 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped 2
192. er of auxiliary motors Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The Autochange function if used requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor e The following describes the set up of the required relay outputs Relay Outputs As noted above each auxiliary motor requires a relay output which the drive uses to send start stop signals The following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays The ACS510 provides relay outputs RO1 RO3 e An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4 RO6 e Parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 define respectively how relays RO1 RO6 are used the parameter value 31 PFC defines the relay as used for PFC The ACS510 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order If the Autochange function is disabled the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on If the Autochange function is used the assignments rotate Initially the speed regulated motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay with a parameter setting 31 PFC and so on
193. erence 1 R W Range 0 20000 scaled to 0 1105 REF1 MAX or 20000 0 scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX 0 40003 Reference 2 R W Range 0 10000 scaled to 0 1108 REF2 MAX or 10000 0 scaled to 1108 REF2 MAXx 0 40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile S STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5320 holds a copy in hex format 40005 Actual 1 R By default stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ Use select using 5310 parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this register 40006 Actual 2 R By default stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT Use parameter select using 5311 5311 to select a different actual value for this register 40007 Actual 3 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5312 to select an select using 5312 actual value for this register 40008 Actual 4 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5313 to select an select by 5313 actual value for this register 40009 Actual 5 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5314 to select an select using 5314 actual value for this register 40010 Actual 6 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5315 to select an select using 5315 actual value for this register 40011 Actual 7 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5316 to select an select using 5316 actual value for this register 40012 Actual 8 R By default stores nothing Use parameter 5317 to select an select using 5317 actual value
194. erence oe 1202 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable CONSTANT SPEED 26 RO3A 1x Default nb OIE Es PONS TANT SPEED 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 CONSTANT SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog reference A11 Analog output AO1 Speed e Start stop and direction DI1 2 Analog output AO2 Current J1 Constant speed selection DI3 4 Relay output 1 Ready 2 gt Al1 0 10 V Ramp pair 1 2 selection DI5 Relay output 2 Running 2 p AI2 0 4 20 mA Runenable DI6 Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 45 Application Macro Motor Potentiometer This macro provides a cost effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed of the drive using only digital signals To enable set the value of parameter 9902 to 4 MOTOR POT Connection example x1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 142 IAN Not used Ko 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC 5 Al2 Not used 6 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 79 AGND Analog output circuit common T 410 24 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC r 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
195. ess sets parameter groups scaling 096 10096 parameters setpoint maximum parameter setpoint minimum parameter setpoint select parameter setpoint source EFB comm activate setpoint source FBA comm activate setpoint data parameter sleep delay parameter sleep level parameter sleep selection parameter trim mode parameter trim scale parameter units actual signal parameter wake up delay parameter wake up deviation parameter PID controller advanced set up 4 basic set up planning EFB comm power data parameter 4 first applied 0 20005 previous faults history parameters process PID sets parameter groups process variables data parameter profiles comm EFB 00 0 eee eee protection circuit required w chopper disconnect device enclosure standard environmental PT100 temperature sensor PTC temperature sensor 243 pump fan control see PFC R radiation limits conducted EN 61800 3 2 2 221 ramp pair accel decel parameter 94 range listing for parameters 51 PALINGS Gosek cote salad etna pale dae adeeb Pea bai 210 r
196. eters The Control Panel memory is non volatile Download Full Set Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to the drive Use this option to restore a drive or to configure identical drives This download does not include user sets of parameters Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 33 Note Download Full Set writes all parameters to the drive including motor parameters Only use this function to restore a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Download Application Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same Download User Set 1 Copies USER s1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive The general procedure for parameter backup operations is 1 Select PAR BACKUP in the Main Menu 2 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired option 3 Press ENTER The parameter set is transferred as directed During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percent of completion 4 Press EXIT to step back to the Out
197. fferent ways Instead of using additional PID controller hardware you can set outputs of the ACS510 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve In this case set Parameter 4230 to value O 0 is the default value You can use External PID PID2 as an additional PID controller to Process PID PID1 to trim or fine tune the speed of the ACS510 Code Description 4001 GAIN Defines the PID Controller s gain The setting range is 0 1 100 At 0 1 the PID Controller output changes one tenth as much as the error value At 100 the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation but provides sluggish response If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short the system can become unstable Procedure e Initially set 4001 GAIN 0 1 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 20 seconds Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation If not increase GAIN 4001 until the actual signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation Reduce GAIN 4001 until the oscillation stops Set GAIN 4001 to 0 4 to 0 6 times the above value Decrea
198. following could also be used to reset the drive Digital input Serial communication When the fault has been corrected the motor can be started History E EA IN n For reference the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401 0412 0413 For the most recent fault identified by parameter 0401 the drive stores additional data in parameters 0402 0411 to aid in troubleshooting a problem For example parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault To clear the fault history all of the Group 04 Fault History parameters Using the control panel in Parameters mode select parameter 0401 Press EDIT or ENTER on the Basic control panel Press UP and Down at the same time Press SAVE Correcting Alarms The recommended corrective action for alarms is Determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action action is not always required Use Alarm Listing below to find and address the root cause of the problem Diagnostics 202 Alarm Listing ACS510 User s Manual The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each Com Display Description 2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active Check for and correct Excessive motor load Insufficient acceleration time parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Faulty motor motor cables or connections 2002 OVERVOLTAGE Over voltage controller is ac
199. for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT 19 PID10UT The reference is taken from the PID1 output See Groups 40 and 41 7 gt P 1302 input signal or 1305 1107 19 PID1 REF2 LIMIT IDEE PER SELECT MAX 1107 1108 S FER 1 17 MIN 1107 1108 REF2 MIN Sets the minimum for external reference 2 The minimum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MIN in 96 Parameter 1301 MINIMUM Al1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency maximum process reference 1108 REF2 MAX Sets the maximum for external reference 2 The maximum analog input signal in volts or amps corresponds to REF2 MAX in Hz e Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM Al1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference The value is a percentage of the maximum frequency maximum process reference Start Up 76 ACS510 User s Manual Group 12 Constant Speeds This group defines a set of constant speeds In general You can program up to 7 constant speeds Values must be positive No negative speed values for constant speeds Constant speed selections are ignored if the process PID reference is followed or the drive is in local control mode or PFC Pump Fan Control is ac
200. for this register 40031 ACS510 CONTROL R W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0301 40032 ACS510 coNTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0302 40033 ACS510 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU WORD LSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0303 40034 ACS510 sTATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU WORD MSW profile s STATUS WORD Supported only if 5305 1 See parameter 0304 Embedded Fieldbus 160 ACS510 User s Manual For the Modbus protocol drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter mapping to 4xxxx Registers Code Description 5310 EFB PAR 10 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005 5311 EFB PAR 11 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006 5312 EFB PAR 12 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007 5313 EFB PAR 13 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008 5314 EFB PAR 14 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009 5315 EFB PAR 15 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010 5316 EFB PAR 16 Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011 5317 EFB PAR 17 Specifies the
201. from the drive The ACS510 supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below grauia Name Meaning 01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command 02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable It is not a defined parameter group 03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable value for the ACS510 because it is one of the following Outside min or max limits Parameter is read only Message is too long Parameter write not allowed when start is active Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected For the Modbus protocol a drive parameter in group 53 holds the most recent exception code Code Description 5318 EFB PAR 18 Holds the most recent exception code Embedded Fieldbus 162 ACS510 User s Manual ABB Control Profiles Technical Data Overview ABB Drives Profile The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple protocols including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module Two implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available ABB DRV FULL This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS600 and ACS800 drives ABB DRV LIM This implementation standardizes the control interface with ACS400 drives This implementation does not support two control word bits supported by ABB DRV FULL Ex
202. g indication is displayed The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME 3011 STALL FREQUENCY This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function Refer to Figure 3012 STALL TIME This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function Torque 4 95 motor normal load Vie Stall region f ra 3011 STALL FREQ HI Start Up 102 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction The protection is activated if The motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE e This condition has lasted longer than the time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME Output frequency is higher than 10 of the nominal frequency 0 NOT SEL Underload protection is not used 1 FAULT When the protection is activated the drive coasts to stop A fault indication is displayed 2 WARNING A warning indication is displayed 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME Time limit for underload protection 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE T This parameter provides five selectable curves U JA shown in the figure 80 Underload curve types If the load drops below the set curve for longer than the time set by parameter 3014 the 4 70 underload protection is activated e Curves 1 3 reach maximum
203. g input circuit common DH H7 AO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA KD 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA 9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10124 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common L 1121DCOM Digital input common for all 1113 DH Start Momentary activation with DI2 activated starts the drive 14 DI2 Stop Momentary deactivation stops the drive 15 DI3 Fwd Rev Activation reverses rotation direction 16 DI4 Constant speed selection 17 DI5 Constant speed selection L_ __ 18 DI6 Not used 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A m Default operation Note 1 Code 21 RO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 0 open 1 connected 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A fx Default operation DI4 DIS Output 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 1 0 0 Reference through Al 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 1 0 CONSTANT SPEED 1 1202 26 RO3A Default operation O 1 CONSTANT SPEED 2 1203 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 T 1 CONSTANT SPEED 3 1204 Fault gt 25 connected to 26 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog reference Al1 Analog output AO1 Speed Start stop and direction DI1 2 3 Analog output AO2 Current J1 e Constant speed selection DI4 5 Relay output 1 Ready 2 B AI1 0 10V Relay output 2 Running 3 P AI2 0 4 20 mA Relay output 3 Fault 1 Start Up 44 ACS510 User s Manual
204. gits desired to the right of the decimal 1 31 Signed point 2 3 14 See table for example using pi 3 14159 3 3 142 8 BAR METER Specifies a bar meter display 4 3 0 65535 9 DIRECT Decimal point location and units of measure are 5 3 1 Unsigned identical to the source signal See Group 01 parameter listing in 6 344 Complete Parameter List for resolution which indicates the 7 3447 decimal point location and the units of measure 3405 JOUTPUT1 UNIT Selects the units used with the first display parameter O NOTSEL 9 C 182MWh 27 ft 36 I s 45 Pa 54 Ib m 63 Mrev 1 A 10 Ib ft 19 m s 28 MGD 37 min 46 GPS 55 Ib h 64 d 22V 11 mA 20 m3h 29 inHg 38 I h 47 gal s 56 FPS 65 inWC 3 Hz 122 mV 21 dm s 30 FPM 39 M s 48 gal m 57 ft s 66 m min 4 13 kW 22 bar 31 kb s 40 2 m m 49 gal h 58 inH2O 5 s 14 W 23 kPa 32 kHz 41 kg s 50 ft s 59 in wg 6 h 15 kWh 24 GPM 33 Ohm 42 kg m 51 ft m 60 ft wg 7 rpm 16 F 25 PSI 34 ppm 43 kg h 52 ft h 61 Ibsi 8 kh 17 hp 26 CFM 35 pps 44 mbar 53 Ib s 62 ms 117 ref 1192 Ydev 121 296 SP 123 lout 125 Fout 127 Vdc 118 act 120 LD 122 FBK 124 Vout 126 Tout 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 109 Code Description
205. h Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder drec iy boned H side by side Copper cables with concentric copper shield teed OU Gabe Load AlCable Max Load Cu Wire Size Current mm Current mm Pos AWG kcmil A A 14 3x1 5 Do not use aluminum 22 8 14 20 3x2 5 cable with frame sizes an 12 27 3x4 36 4 10 34 3x6 50 1 8 47 3x10 68 3 6 62 3x16 86 5 4 79 3x25 100 3 98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2 119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1 153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1 0 186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2 0 215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3 0 249 3x150 218 3x185 237 4 0 284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1 274 3x 3x50 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1 0 285 2x 3x95 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2 0 Ground Connections For personnel safety proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission pick up the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet safety regulations Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety regulations n multiple drive installations do not connect drive terminals in series Technical Data 216 ACS510 User s Manual Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks A Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 or EM3 screws while power is applied to the
206. hat the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ as the 100 reference and that 9907 500 Hz Diagnostics EFB Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics For general ACS510 diagnostics information see Diagnostics starting on page 195 The three most recent ACS510 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined below Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 0401 Last Fault 40401 0412 Previous Fault 1 40402 0413 Previous Fault 2 40403 Serial Communication Diagnostics Network problems can be caused by multiple sources Some of these sources are Loose connections Incorrect wiring including swapped wires Bad grounding Duplicate station numbers Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53 EFB Protocol parameters 5306 5309 The Complete Parameter Descriptions section describes these parameters in detail Embedded Fieldbus 152 ACS510 User s Manual Diagnostic Situations The sub sections below describe various diagnostic situations the problem symptoms and corrective actions Normal Operation During normal network operation 5306 5309 parameter values act as follows at each drive 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances advances for each message properly received and addressed to this drive 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all advances
207. he MOTOR NOM VOLT Field weakening point Nom Freq Supply Volt Mot Nom Volt 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED Defines the nominal motor speed Must equal the value on the motor rating plate P 9905 Output frequency Start Up 64 ACS510 User s Manual 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER Defines the nominal motor power Must equal the value on the motor rating plate Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 65 Group 01 Operating Data This group contains drive operating data including actual signals The drive sets the values for actual signals based on measurements or calculations You cannot set these values Code Description 0102 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor rpm 0103 OUTPUT FREQ The frequency Hz applied to the motor Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0104 CURRENT The motor current as measured by the ACS510 Also shown by default in OUTPUT display 0105 TORQUE Output torque Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in Yo of motor nominal torque 0106 POWER The measured motor power in kW 0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE The DC bus voltage in VDC as measured by the ACS510 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE The voltage applied to the motor 0110 DRIVE TEMP The temperature of the drive power transistors in Centigrade 0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 External reference REF1 in Hz 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 External reference REF2 in 96 0113
208. ides faster deceleration by raising the level of magnetization in the motor when needed instead of limiting the deceleration ramp By increasing the flux in the motor the energy of the mechanical system is changed to thermal energy in the motor 0 Disables the feature 1 Enables the feature Brakin Torque Rated Motor Power 120 W O Flux Braking O TSA 3 37 kW BO 4 75 kW 5 250 kW 50 f Hz 2603 IR COMP VOLT Sets the IR compensation voltage used for O Hz Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent overheating Typical IR compensation values are 380 480 V Units RcompV 38 15 312 8 3 2604 IR COMP FREQ Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is O V in of motor frequency IR Compensation When enabled IR Compensation provides an extra voltage boost to the motor at low speeds Use IR Compensation for example in applications that require a high breakaway torque Motor Voltage A IR Compensated B No compensation P 2603 f Hz Start Up 98 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 2605 U f RATIO Selects the form for the U f voltage to frequency ratio below field weakening point A Motor KAROT Voltage 1 LINEAR Preferred for constant torque applications P2618 2 SQUARE Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan FW VOL f applications Square is more silent for mo
209. if motor magnetization is not complete Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time 3 SCALAR FLYSTART Selects the flying start mode The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency 4 TORQ BOOST Selects the automatic torque boost mode May be necessary in drives with high starting torque Torque boost is only applied at start ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is equal to reference In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using DC current See parameter 2110 TORO BOOST CURR 5 FLYSTART TORQ BOOST Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized If the speed is found to be zero the torque boost is done 2102 STOP FUNCTION Selects the motor stop method 1 COAST Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method The motor coasts to stop 2 RAMP Selects using a deceleration ramp Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 whichever is active 2103 DC MAGN TIME Defines the pre magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode Use
210. ile upload or download is in progress 5026 Value is at or below low limit 5027 Value is at or above high limit 5028 Value is invalid doesn t match any values in the discrete values list 5029 Memory is not ready try again 5030 Request is invalid 5031 5032 Drive is not ready e g due to Low DC voltage Parameter error was detected 5040 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup Diagnostics ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 5041 Parameter backup doesn t fit into memory 5042 Selected parameter set can t be found in the current parameter backup 5043 No start inhibit was granted 5044 Parameter backup versions do not match 5050 Parameter upload was aborted 5051 File error was detected 5052 Parameter upload attempt has failed 5060 Parameter download was aborted 5062 Parameter download attempt has failed 5070 Panel backup memory write error was detected 5071 Panel backup memory read error was detected 5080 Operation is not allowed because the drive is not in local mode 5081 Operation is not allowed because a fault is active 5082 Operation is not allowed because override mode is enabled 5083 Operation is not allowed because parameter lock is not open 5084 Operation is not allowed
211. imit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays an alarm 2010 MOTOR OVERTEMP For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated 3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement At motor temperatures above this limit the drive displays a fault 9 MOTOR OVERTEMP and stops the drive For thermistors 0 de activated 1 activated Start Up 112 Group 40 Process PID Set 1 This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID PID1 controller Typically only parameters in this group are needed PID Controller Basic Set up ACS510 User s Manual In PID control mode the drive compares a reference signal setpoint to an actual signal feedback and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two signals The difference between the two signals is the error value Typically PID control mode is used when the speed of a motor needs to be controlled based on pressure flow or temperature In most cases when there is only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACS510 only parameter group 40 is needed The following is a schematic of setpoint feedback signal flow using parameter group
212. in mm lin W 215 18 5 215 18 5 257 10 1 257 10 1 369 14 5 410 16 1 Technical Data 233 ACS510 User s Manual IP 54 Dimensions for each Frame Size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm lin mm lin mm lin mm lin mm lin W2 225 8 9 225 8 9 267 10 5 267 10 5 369 14 5 410 16 1 H3 441 17 4 541 21 3 604 23 8 723 28 5 776 30 5 924 364 D 238 9 37 245 9 6 276 10 9 306 12 0 309 12 2 423 16 6 Weight The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size Variations within each frame size due to components associated with voltage current ratings and options are minor Weight Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 kg kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib kg Ib IP 21 65 14 3 9 0 19 8 16 350 24 53 0 34 75 69 152 IP 54 8 2 18 1 11 2 24 7 18 5 40 8 26 5 58 4 38 5 84 9 86 190 Degrees of Protection Available enclosures IP 21 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles P 54 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Compared to the IP 21 enclosure the IP 54 enclosure has The same internal plastic shell as
213. ion Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive Can be monitored by the user No user setting possible FbEq Fieldbus equivalent The scaling between the value shown on the panel and the integer used in serial communication Parameter A user adjustable operation instruction of the drive Group 99 Start up Data This group defines special Start up data required to Set up the drive Enter motor information Code Description 9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language 0 ENGLISH 1 CHINESE 2 KOREAN 9902 APPLIC MACRO Selects an application macro Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACS510 for a particular application 1 ABB STANDARD 2 3 WIRE 3 ALTERNATE 4 MOTOR POT 5 HAND AUTO 6 PID CONTROL 7 PFC CONTROL 15 SPFC CONTROL 0 USER S1 LOAD 1 USER S1 SAVE 2 USER S2 LOAD 3 USER S2 SAVE 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT Output voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage pt Must equal the value on the motor rating plate The ACS510 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the mains voltage 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR Defines the nominal motor current Must equal the value on the motor rating plate e Range allowed 0 2 2 0 lon 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ P 9907 Defines the nominal motor frequency Range 10 500 Hz or 10 50 HZ N688 or 10 55 HZ N689 Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals t
214. ions describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function For the protocol specific details see the document supplied with the FBA module Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Reference Drive Parameter Value Description ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext1 selected 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 10 COMM Start Stop by fieldbus 40001 bits 0 3 40031 bits O 1 with Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction by fieldbus 40002 40003 40031 bit 3 This parameter is not available in software option N688 and N689 1 For Modbus the protocol reference can depend on the profile used hence two columns in these tables One column refers to the ABB Drives profile selected when parameter 5305 0 ABB DRV LIM or 5305 2 ABB DRV FULL The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when parameter 5305 1 DCU PROFILE See ABB Control Profiles Technical Data on page 162 2 The reference provides direction control a negative reference provides reverse rotation Embedded Fie
215. iple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers For the ACS510 the 2 analog input Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 amp 2 Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output For the ACS510 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register For the ACS510 the entire Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics Subcodes for Query 0x00 Restart 0x01 amp Listen Only 0x04 are supported Force Multiple Coils OxOF Write multiple discrete outputs For the ACS510 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers For the ACS510 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single Holding Registers command Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 155 Mapping Summary The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACS510 parameters and 1 0 and Modbus reference space For details see Modbus Addressing below
216. irs of ramps and use a digital input to select one or the other pair Code Description 2201 ACCIDEC 1 2 SEL Defines control for selection of acceleration deceleration ramps e Ramps are defined in pairs one each for acceleration and deceleration See below for the ramp definition parameters 0 NOT SEL Disables selection the first ramp pair is used 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 above 7 COMM Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection 1 DIT INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection De activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2 Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection See DI1 INV above 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 max Li Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1 See A in FREQ T figure Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY 2203 DECELER TIME 1 7 B 0 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1 gt T e Actual decelerati
217. is error code appears refer to the appropriate accessory manual 24 RESERVED Not used 25 RESERVED Not used 26 DRIVE ID Internal fault Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid Contact your local ABB sales representative 27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error Contact your local ABB sales representative 28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 29 EFB CONFIG Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus FILE 30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus See the fieldbus User s Manual 31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus EFB protocol application 32 zum The meaning is protocol dependent 33 EFB 3 Diagnostics ACS510 User s Manual 199 Fault Code Fault Name In Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit One of the motor phases is lost Check for and correct Motor fault Motor cable fault Thermal relay fault if used Internal fault 35 OUTPUT WIRING Possible power wiring error detected When the drive is not running it monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the drive output Check for and co
218. ite contamination level IP 21 enclosure The site must be free of airborne dust corrosive gases or liquids and conductive contaminants such as condensation carbon dust and metallic particles IP 54 enclosure This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions Suitable Mounting Location Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth solid surface and in a suitable environment as defined above The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions see Outside Dimensions on page 232 plus air flow space around the unit see Cooling on page 229 The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor cable length See either Motor Connection Specifications on page 219 or Motor Cable Requirements for CE Compliance on page 220 The mounting site must support the drive s modest weight See Weight on page 233 Installation ACS510 User s Manual 11 Installing the Drive A Warning Before installing the ACS510 ensure the input power supply to the drive is off Prepare the Mounting Location The ACS510 should only be mounted where all of the requirements defined in Preparing for Installation on page 8 are met 1 Mark the position of the mounting holes 1 2 Drill the holes X0002 Note Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes
219. ive s PFC logic can then recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next available motor Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay or other protective device in the motor circuit to the Interlock input the drive s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor 0 NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function All digital inputs are available for other purposes Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is disabled 1 DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input starting with D11 to the interlock signal for each PFC relay These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on The number of PFC relays number of parameters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 and with value 31 PFC The Autochange function status disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0 and otherwise enabled No PFC Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled Relays P 8118 P 8118 0 DI1 Speed Reg Motor Not allowed DI2 DI6 Free 1 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 DI6 Free DI3 DI6 Free 2 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 DI6 Free DI4 DI6 Free 3 DI1 Speed Reg Motor DI1 First PFC Relay DI2 First PFC Relay DI2 Second PFC Relay DI3 Second PFC Relay DI3 Third PFC Relay DI4 Third PFC Relay D
220. kly adopted as a de facto standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices Modbus is a serial asynchronous protocol Transactions are half duplex featuring a single Master controlling one or more Slaves While RS232 can be used for point to point communication between a single Master and a single Slave a more common implementation features a multi drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling multiple Slaves The ACS510 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes ASCII and RTU The ACS510 supports RTU only Feature Summary The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACS510 Function Code Hex Description Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status For the ACS510 the individual bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1 16 Relay outputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 e g RO1 Coil 33 Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status For the ACS510 the individual bits Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1 16 or 1 32 depending on the active profile Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with Input 33 e g DI1 Input 33 Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers For the ACS510 the entire Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers as well as command status and reference values Read Mult
221. l Starting from the Output mode press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following alternate modes reF Reference PAr Parameter e CoPY Copy 2 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the reF Reference Mode 3 Press MENU ENTER The display shows the current reference value with under the value Note Normally reference adjustment is only possible here when under LOC control but settings in Group 11 do allow reference adjustments under REM control The display indicates when reference adjustment is possible at the control panel 4 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired reference value 5 Press EXIT RESET to step back to the Output mode Parameters Mode Use the Parameter Mode to set parameter values Starting from the Output mode press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following alternate modes reF Reference PAr Parameter CoPY Copy 2 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the PAr Parameter Mode 3 Press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the parameter groups 01 99 Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 39 4 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the desired group for example 03 5 Press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the parameters in the selected parameter group For example 0301 6 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the desired parameter 7 Press MENU ENTER either 10 Press
222. ldbus ACS510 User s Manual 147 Input Reference Select Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied reference word s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1102 EXT1 EXT2 SEL 8 COMM Reference set selection by fieldbus 40001 bit 11 40031 bit 5 1103 REF1 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 1 by fieldbus 40002 1106 REF2 SEL 8 COMM Input reference 2 by fieldbus 40003 Reference Scaling Where required REFERENCES can be scaled See the following as appropriate Modbus Register 40002 in the Modbus Protocol Technical Data section Reference Scaling in the ABB Control Profiles Technical Data section Miscellaneous Drive Control Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Modbus Protocol Drive Parameter Value Description Reference ABB DRV DCU PROFILE 1601 RUN ENABLE 7 COMM Run enable by fieldbus 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6 inverted 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 COMM Fault reset by fi
223. le FBA Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Frequency 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by 32767 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2007 2008 20000 corresponds to 100 frequency REF2 32767 Frequency 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by 32767 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2007 2008 10000 corresponds to 100 frequency PID 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by Reference 0 0 4012 4013 PID set1 or 10000 par 1108 4112 4113 PID set2 10000 corresponds to 100 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF 1 COMM AI1 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 2 Input Signal 0 10095 Fieldbus Adapter 190 ACS510 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile FBA Reference Value Setting Al Reference Scaling REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference ACorrec
224. lects the first supervised parameter Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating Data If the supervised parameter passes a limit a relay output is energized The supervision limits are defined in this group The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs definition also specifies which supervision limit is monitored LO HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LOSHI Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV 2 OVER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal exceeds a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value drops below the low limit Case B Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 UNDER Use for monitoring when if the supervised signal falls below a given limit The relay remains active until the supervised value rises above the high limit LO gt HI Operating data supervision using relay outputs when LO gt HI The lowest limit Hi 3203 is active initially and remains active until the supervised parameter goes above the highest limit LO 3202 making that limit the active limit That limit remains active until the supervised parameter goes below the lowest limit HI 3203 making that limit active Case A Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 or 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 etc value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2 OVER Initially the relay is de energized It is energiz
225. led Modbus input registers Any user defined analog inputs The following table summarizes the input registers Modbus ACS510 Remarks Reference All Profiles 30001 Alt This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 0 100 30002 Al2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 0 100 The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers F 04 unction Code Description Read 3xxxx input status 4xxxx Register Mapping The drive maps its parameters and other data to the 4xxxx holding registers as follows 40001 40099 map to drive control and actual values These registers are described in the table below 40101 49999 map to drive parameters 0101 9999 Register addresses that do not correspond to drive parameters are invalid If there is an attempt to read or write outside the parameter addresses the Modbus interface returns an exception code to the controller Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual 159 The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001 40099 for 4xxxx registers above 40099 see the drive parameter list e g 40102 is parameter 0102 Modbus Register Access Remarks 40001 CONTROL WORD R W Maps directly to the profile s CONTROL WORD Supported only if 5305 0 or 2 ABB Drives profile Parameter 5319 holds a copy in hex format 40002 Ref
226. les 100 0 5 Par 1105 100 0 5 par 1105 Reference Value Al Reference Scaling Setting REF1 COMM AI1 COMM Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 Alt Input Signal 0 l gt 50 100 Embedded Fieldbus 172 ACS510 User s Manual ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Reference Value Al Reference Scaling Setting REF1 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF1 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 1 l l l l l 100 l l l Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 gt Npa 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM 96 Al 96 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 l l l l l 100 l l l l i A11 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt Mo 50 10096 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference Correction Coefficient 200 1 l l l l l 100 l l l i A11 Input Signal o L 0 50 10096 Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual Reference Handling 173 Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus r
227. listing of all parameters that have been changed from macro default values Procedure Select CHANGED PAR in the Main Menu The display lists all changed parameters 2 Press ENTER 3 Press UP DOWN to select a changed parameter As each parameter is highlighted the parameter value appears 4 Press EDIT to edit the parameter value Press UP DOWN to select a new value edit the parameter value Pressing both keys at the same time sets a parameter to its default value Press SAVE to save the new parameter value If the new value is the default value the parameter will no longer appear on the Changed Parameters listing Fault Logger Mode N Use the Fault Logger Mode to see drive fault history fault state details and help for the faults Select FAULT LOGGER in the Main Menu Press ENTER to see the latest faults up to 10 faults maximum Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault Details are available for the three latest faults Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault See Diagnostics section Note If a power off occurs only the three latest faults will remain with details only for the most recent fault Par Backup Mode The Assistant Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters The Par Backup mode has these functions Upload to Panel Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel This includes user sets of parameters if defined and internal param
228. m code appears refer to the appropriate accessory manual 2025 FIRST START This alarm occurs a few seconds during the scalar flystart first active Note 1 Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions e g parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 5 ALARM or 16 FLT ALARM this alarm is not indicated by a relay output Alarm Codes Basic Control Panel The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code A5xxx The following table lists the alarm codes and descriptions Code Description 5001 Drive is not responding 5002 The communication profile is incompatible with the drive 5010 The panel s parameter backup file is corrupted 5011 Drive is controlled from another source 5012 Rotation direction is locked 5013 Button is disabled because start is inhibited 5014 Button is disabled because drive is faulted 5015 Button is disabled because local mode lock is on 5018 Parameter default value can t be found 5019 Writing a non zero value is prohibited can only write a zero value 5020 Group or parameter does not exist or parameter value is inconsistent 5021 Group or parameter is hidden 5022 Group or parameter is write protected 5023 Modification is not allowed while the drive is running 5024 Drive is busy try again 5025 Write is not allowed wh
229. m in mm in mm in W1 980 3 9 98 0 3 9 160 16 3 160 16 3 238 94 263 10 4 W2 98 0 3 9 98 0 3 9 Ht 318 125 418 164 473 18 6 578 228 588 23 2 675 266 55 02 55 o2 6 5 025 65 025 16 5 025 90 035 10 0 04 10 0 04 130 05 13 0 0 5 140 0 55 140 0 55 55 02 55 o2 amp o 03 80 fos 85 os 85 o3 55 02 55 o2 65 0o25 65 025 65 025 90 035 aoj ojoo Center to center dimension Technical Data 232 Outside Dimensions Units with IP 21 Enclosures ACS510 User s Manual D e H H2 b do f7 O O X0031 IP 21 Dimensions for each Frame Size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 Ref mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in 125 4 9 125 4 9 203 8 0 203 8 0 265 10 4 300 11 8 H 330 13 0 430 16 9 490 19 3 596 23 4 602 23 7 700 27 6 H2 315 12 4 415 16 3 478 18 8 583 23 0 578 22 8 698 27 5 H3 369 14 5 469 18 5 583 23 0 689 27 1 739 29 1 880 34 6 D 212 8 3 222 8 7 231 9 1 262 10 3 286 11 3 400 15 8 Units with IP 54 Enclosures pM H3 D IP 54 Dimensions for each Frame Size Ref R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm lin mm lin mm lin mm in mm l
230. maximum braking torque is not necessary resistor values can exceed Rmax The resistor power rating must be high enough to dissipate the braking power This requirement involves many factors The maximum continuous power rating for the resistor s The rate at which the resistor changes temperature resistor thermal time constant Maximum braking time ON If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power there is a limit to the ON time or the resistor overheats before the OFF period begins Minimum braking time OFF If the regeneration braking power is larger than the resistor rated power the OFF time must be large enough for the resistor to cool between ON periods A Braking ON Time Braking OFF ON Time OFF Time ru 4 D tv Cycle s ON Time Ji Cycle Time SA uty Cycle Cycle Time Time The peak braking power requirement Type of braking deceleration to zero vs overhauling load During deceleration to zero the generated power steadily decreases averaging half of the peak power For an overhauling load the braking is countering an external force gravity for example and the braking power is constant The total heat generated from an overhauling load is double the heat generated from deceleration to zero speed for the same peak torque and ON time Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 225 Power A Deceleration Cu
231. minal voltage parameter 63 phase fault code 199 stall fault code 197 motor cable checking insulation 0 18 max length nanana 0 0 0 eee 219 requirements 220 requirements EMC 220 motor connection UGS for R6 soe pagba babaha had wade LES 217 terminal size 0055 217 torque cep Ecrit ADS 217 motor control IR compensation parameters 97 parameter group 00 5 97 motor potentiometer macro 45 motor temperature alarm limit parameter 111 data parameter 2 67 fault limit parameter 111 measure parameter group 110 overtemperature fault code 197 sensor selection parameter 111 sensor type parameter 111 thermal protection fault parameter 100 thermal time fault parameter 100 motor auxiliary aux start delay PFC parameter 131 aux stop delay PFC parameter 131 number of aux parameter 132 mounting dimensions 200 000 231 MWh counter data parameter 67 N NEMA ratings See ratings noise random sw freq parameter 98 NE AA ee USER eres 18 ACS510 User s Manual O offset PID parameter a 121 operating data parameter group 65 OPEX link f
232. mm 3 0 AWG or larger Smaller wires will loosen and may damage the drive and require ring lugs as described below Ring Lugs On the R6 frame size if the cable size used is less than 95 mm A are supplied use ring lugs according to the following procedure 1 Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table 3 0 AWG or if no compression lugs 2 Attach the supplied terminal lugs to the drive end of the cables 3 Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing Technical Data 218 4 Attach terminal lug to the drive Wire Size cimi i f rimpin 0 0 mm2 kcmil Manufacturer Ring Lug Toni g Crimps AWG pa e Burndy YAV6C L2 MY29 3 1 lIsco CCL 6 38 ILC 10 2 T Burndy YAAC LABOX MY29 3 1 llsco CCL 4 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA2C L4BOX MY29 3 2 35 2 lIsco CRC 2 IDT 12 1 llsco CCL 2 38 MT 25 1 Burndy YA1C L4BOX MY29 3 2 5 lIsco CRA 1 38 IDT 12 1 lIsco CCL 1 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54148 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA25 L4BOX MY29 3 2 lIsco CRB 0 IDT 12 1 55 1 0 lIsco CCL 1 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54109 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL26T38 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 2 0 IDT 12 1 70 2 0 lIsco CCL 2 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54110 TBM 8 3 Burndy YAL27T38 MY29 3 2 lIsco CRA 3 0 IDT 12 1 95 310 llsco CCL 3 0 38 MT 25 1 Thomas amp Betts 54111 TBM 8 3 Burndy YA28R4 MY29 3 2 llsco CRA 4 0 IDT 12 1 95 3 0 lIsc
233. mmetrically Grounded Networks and Floating Networks on page 216 Warning Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 EM3 F1 or F2 screws while power is applied to the drive s input terminals Note For more technical information contact the factory or your local ABB sales representative Safety ACS510 User s Manual Use of Warnings and Notes GB There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact or give information on a subject Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and or damage to the equipment They also tell you how to avoid the danger The warning symbols are used as follows Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical injury and or damage to the equipment General warning warns about conditions other than those caused by electricity which can result in physical injury and or damage to the equipment Safety ACS510 User s Manual 5 Table of Contents Safety Use of Warnings and Notes 0c cece eee 4 Table of Contents Installation Installation Flow Chart 0 0 cee ee ee eee I 7 Preparing for Installation orc how po hee pee eee ea oe GE Kea 8 Installing the Drive d e mmt del geen teed ani Y 11 Start Up Control Panels saeco ey a ru es eA eh NG aE CEU ete Lt rur eur 27 Assistant Control Panel 202 eee eee ren 27 Basic
234. n exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target drive The Basic control panel automatically handles these situations by Discarding parameters values not available on the target drive Using parameter default values when the download provides no values or invalid values Alarm Codes The Basic Control Panel indicates Control Panel alarms with a code of the form A5xxx See Alarm Codes Basic Control Panel on page 204 for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 41 Application Macros Macros change a group of parameters to new predefined values Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of parameters Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values except Group 99 Start up Data parameters The PARAMETER LOCK 1602 The PARAM SAVE 1607 The COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 and COMM FAULT TIME 3019 The COMM PROT SEL 9802 Groups 51 53 parameters After selecting a macro additional parameter changes can be made manually using the control panel Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO By default 1 ABB Standard is the enabled macro The following sections describe each of the application macros and provide a connection example for each macro The last section below Macro Default Values for Parameters lists the parameters that the macros change and the default values established by each macro
235. n if serial communication is lost 2 CONST SP7 3 LAST SPEED Drive Parameter Value Description 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 NOT SEL Set for appropriate drive 1 FAULT response 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss Feedback from the Drive FBA Inputs to the controller drive outputs have pre defined meanings established by the protocol This feedback does not require drive configuration The following table lists a sample of feedback data For a complete listing see all parameters listed in Complete Parameter Descriptions Drive Parameter Protocol Reference 0102 SPEED 0103 FREQ OUTPUT 0104 CURRENT 0105 TORQUE 0106 POWER 0107 DC BUS VOLT 0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 0 STOP 0301 FB STATUS WORD bit 2 REV 0118 DI1 3 STATUS bit 1 DI3 Fieldbus Adapter 182 ACS510 User s Manual Scaling To scale the drive parameter values see the Actual Value Scaling in the following sections as appropriate ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data Diagnostics FBA Fault Handling The ACS510 provides fault information as follows The control panel display shows a fault code and text See Diagnostics starting on page 195 for a complete description Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT 0402 PREVI
236. n the macro used Review the macro descriptions in Application Macros on page 41 Use the macro that best fits system needs Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro Assistant Control Panel Refer to Parameters Mode on page 30 for parameter editing instructions Installation 26 ACS510 User s Manual Basic Control Panel Refer to Parameters Mode on page 38 for parameter editing instructions Tuning Parameters The system can benefit from one or more of the ACS510 special features and or fine tuning 1 Review the parameter descriptions in Complete Parameter Descriptions starting on page 63 Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the system 2 Edit parameters as appropriate Fault and Alarm Adjustments The ACS510 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems For example initial system operation may generate faults or alarms that indicate set up problems 1 Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number Note the number reported 2 Review the description provided for the reported fault alarm Use the fault and alarm listings on pages 196 and 202 respectively or page 204 for the Basic Control Panel s alarm listing or Press the help key Assistant Control Panel only while fault or alarm is displayed 3 Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate Installation ACS510 User s Manual 27 Start Up Sta
237. nal auxiliary pumps using the same process When demand drops such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit user defined by a frequency limit the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary pump The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s missing output An Interlock function when enabled identifies off line out of service motors and the PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence An Autochange function when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear equalizes duty time between the pump motors Autochange periodically increments the position of each motor in the rotation the speed regulated motor becomes the last auxiliary motor the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor etc The soft start function ensures that all motors are started smoothly When new motors need to be started due to increasing pumping capacity need they are powered up by the drive as follows When motor 1 reaches the AC powerline frequency it is disconnected from the drive and switched to direct on line connection with a slight delay in between Motor 2 is connected to drive output After a slight delay the motor speed is increased to fulfil the pumping capacity needed Motor 3 6 are sterted accoring to the same routine The motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine This is the way PFC Soft Start controls the motor
238. nction Generator ENABLED Param 0104 CURRENT f Param 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CWzxxxx x1xx x111 1111 n Speed i e Bit 6 1 Indicates the features not in ABB DRV LIM OPERATING SW Bit8 1 This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source e g digital input Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual Reference Scaling ABB Drives and DCU Profiles The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives and DCU 171 profiles ABB Drives and DCU Profiles Reference Reference Range Type Scaling Remarks REF1 32767 Frequency 20000 par 1105 Final reference limited by sis 0 0 1104 1105 Actual motor 132767 20000 par 1105 speed limited by 2007 2008 20000 corresponds to 10096 frequency REF2 32767 Frequency 10000 par 1108 Final reference limited by T 0 0 1107 1108 Actual motor 32767 10000 par 1108 speed limited by 2007 2008 10000 corresponds to 100 frequency PID Reference 10000 par 1108 0 0 10000 par 1108 10000 corresponds to 100 Final reference limited by 4012 4013 PID set1 or 4112 4113 PID set2 Note The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on the scaling of references When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM AI1 or COMM AI1 the reference is scaled as follows ABB Drives and DCU Profi
239. ne motors or 1 speed regulated 3 connected direct on line and 3 spare motors This value includes also the speed regulated motor This value must be compatible with number of relays allocated to PFC if the autochange function is used If Autochange function is not used the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC but it needs to be included in this value Start Up ACS510 User s Manual Group 98 Options 141 This group configures for options in particular enabling serial communication with the drive Code Description 9802 COMM PROT SEL Selects the communication protocol 0 NOT SEL No communication protocol selected 1 STD MODBUS The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel X1 communications terminal See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL 4 EXT FBA The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE Start Up 142 ACS510 User s Manual Embedded Fieldbus Overview The ACS510 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard serial communication protocols When using serial communication the ACS510 can either Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus or Becontrolled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available control locations such as digital or analog inputs
240. nect Device The ACS510 does not include a disconnect device A means to disconnect input power must be installed between the AC power source and the ACS510 This disconnect device must Be sized to conform to applicable safety regulations including but not limited to both national and local electrical codes Belocked in the open position during installation and maintenance work The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor Instead use the control panel or commands to the I O terminals for motor control Fuses Branch circuit protection must be provided by the end user and sized per national and local electric codes The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the drive s input power Technical Data 214 Fuses 380 480 Volt Drives Emergency Stop Devices Input Power Cables Wiring ACS510 User s Manual ACS510 01 Input Current Mains Fuses see below A IEC269 gG A UL Class T A Bussmann Type 03A3 4 3 3 10 10 JJS 10 04A1 4 4 1 05A6 4 5 6 07A2 4 7 2 09A4 4 9 4 15 JJS 15 012A 4 11 9 16 017A 4 17 20 JJS 20 025A 4 25 25 30 JJS 30 031A 4 31 35 40 JJS 40 038A 4 38 50 50 JJS 50 045A 4 45 60 JJS 60 060A 4 60 63 80 JJS 80 072A 4 72 80 90 JJS 90 096A 4 96 125 125 JJS 125 124A 4 124 160 175 JJS 175 157A 4 157 200 200 JJS 200 180A 4 180 250 250 JJS 250 195A 4 195 250 250 JJS
241. nel The Safety instructions on the first pages of this manual must be followed Diagnostic Displays The drive detects error situations and reports them using The green and red LED on the body of the drive The status LED on the control panel if an Assistant control panel is attached to the drive The control panel display if a control panel is attached to the drive The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits parameters 0305 to 0309 See Group 03 FB Actual Signals on page 68 for the bit definitions The form of the display depends on the severity of the error You can specify the severity for many errors by directing the drive to gnore the error situation Reportthe situation as an alarm Reportthe situation as a fault Red Faults The drive signals that it has detected a severe error or fault by Enabling the red LED on the drive LED is either steady on or blinking Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter 0305 to 0307 Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code Stopping the motor if it was on The fault code on the control panel display is temporary Pressing any of the following buttons removes the fault message MENU ENTER UP button or DOWN button The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not touched and the fault is still active Diagnostics 196 Correcting Faults Flashing Green Alarms ACS510 User
242. ng frequency parameter 2606 is used either Derate Py and lon to 80 or Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 7 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 90 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details If the 12 kHz switching frequency parameter 2606 is used either e Derate Py and loy to 65 and derate ambient temperature maximum to 30 C 86 F or Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL 7 1 ON which allows the drive to reduce the switching frequency if when the drive s internal temperature exceeds 80 C See the parameter description for 2607 for details Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 213 Input Power Connections Warning Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage range Over voltage can result in permanent damage to the drive Input Power Specifications Input Power Mains Connection Specifications Voltage U4 380 400 415 440 460 480 VAC 3 phase 10 15 Prospective short Maximum allowed prospective short circuit current in the supply is 100 kA circuit current in a second providing that the mains cable of the drive is protected with IEC 629 appropriate fuses Frequency 48 63 Hz Imbalance Max 3 of nominal phase to phase input voltage Fundamental power 0 98 at nominal load factor cos phi Cable Temperature 90 C 194 F rating minimum Rating Discon
243. ng questions Whattypes and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 177 Mechanical and Electrical Installation FBA Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Overview The FBA fieldbus adapter is a plug in module that fits in the drive s expansion slot 2 The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws The screws also ground the shield for the module cable and connect the module GND signals to the drive control board On installation of the module electrical connection to the drive is automatically established through the 34 pin connector Mounting Procedure Note Install the input power and motor cables first AL uita ug dw i i Ano BEC wi 1 Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2 ba imm f until the retaining clips lock the module into position 2 Fasten the two screws included to the stand offs Note Correct installation of the screws is essential for fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of the module 7 X00301 3 Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and install the cable clamp for the network cable ella 4 Route the network cable through the ca
244. nit Chopper and resistor Brake Options A Warning For floating impedance grounded or unsymmetrically grounded networks disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing screws EM1 and EM3 See Floating Networks on page 216 Installation 16 ACS510 User s Manual The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes R5 and R6 R5 Ti Power Input U1 V1 W1 Optional braking Frame Terminal Size Labels LO arnt eu cy Power Output to Motor U2 V2 W2 Brake Options R5 R6 UDC UDC Braking unit Chopper and resistor Power Input U1 V1 W1 F2 F1 0009 509 n 9 Power Output to Motor U2 V2 W2 Warning For floating impedance grounded or unsymmetrically grounded networks disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing screws F1 and F2 See Floating Networks on page 21
245. ntation Modbus Addressing With Modbus each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set Thus the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message Note The ACS510 supports the zero based addressing of the Modbus specification Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message Similarly coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message Refer again to the Mapping Summary above The following sections describe in detail the mapping to each Modbus reference set Oxxxx Mapping Modbus Coils The drive maps the following information to the Oxxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils Bit wise map of the CONTROL WORD selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose Embedded Fieldbus 156 ACS510 User s Manual Relay output states numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033 The following table summarizes the Oxxxx reference set Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL Ref All Profiles 5305 0 5305 1 5305 2 00001 CONTROL WORD BitO OFF1 STOP OFF 1 00002 CONTROL WORD Bit 1 OFF2 START OFF2 00003 CONTROL WORD Bit 2 OFF3 REVERSE OFF3 00004 CONTROL WORD Bit 3 START LOCAL START 00005 CONTROL WORD Bit 4 N A RESET RAMP OUT ZERO 00006 CONTROL
246. o CCL 4 0 38 MT 25 2 Thomas amp Betts 54112 TBM 8 4 Compression Lugs 1 Attach the supplied compression lugs to the drive end of the cables 2 Attach compression lug to the drive Use the following procedure to attach cables if compression lugs are supplied and can be 1 used E X60003 ACS510 User s Manual Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual Motor Connections A A A 219 Warning Never connect line power to the drive output terminals U2 V2 or W2 Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit If frequent bypassing is required use mechanically interlocked switches or contactors Warning Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half of the drive s nominal input voltage Warning Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance Hi Pot test or insulation resistance Megger test on the motor or motor cables Do not conduct these tests on the drive Motor Connection Specifications Motor Connection Specifications Voltage U2 0 U4 3 phase symmetrical U max at the field weakening point Frequency 0 500 Hz Frequency Resolution 0 01 Hz Current See Ratings on page 210 Field Weakening Point 10 500 Hz Switching Frequency Cable Temperature Rating Selectable 1 4 8 or 12 kHz 90 C 194 F rating minimum Maximum Motor Cable Length
247. of view For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view Network planning should address the following questions What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network What control information must be sent down to the drives What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling system Mechanical and Electrical Installation EFB A Warning Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected from the power source Drive terminals 28 32 are for RS485 communications Use Belden 9842 or equivalent Belden 9842 is a dual twisted shielded pair cable with a wave impedance of 120 Q Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link Use this pair to connect all A terminals together and all B terminals together Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground terminal 31 leaving one wire unused Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point Ground all devices on the network using their corresponding earthing terminals As always the grounding wires should not form any closed loops and all the devices should be earthed to a common ground Connect the RS485 link in a daisy chained bus without dropout lines Embedded Fieldbus 144 ACS510 User s Manual To reduce noise on the network terminate the RS485 network using 120 Q resi
248. ol provide reference DI3 increases the speed the U stands for up DI4 decreases the reference the D stands for down e Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change R Stop command resets the reference to zero NC Reference value is not copied 12 DI3U 4D NC Same as DI3U 4D RNC above except Stop command does not reset reference to zero At restart the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 13 pi5u 6D NC Same as DI3U 4D NC above except Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6 14 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 15 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 16 A1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 17 AI1 AI2 Defines an analog input 1 A11 and analog input 2 A12 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 19 INTERNAL A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference Start Up 116 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description Analog Input Reference Correction Parameter values 9 10 and 14 17 use the formula in
249. ol cable sheathing and twist the copper Route control cable s through clamp s and Connect the ground screen pig tail for digital and Cut the cable seals as needed for the power motor and control cables The cable seals are cone shaped rubber seals on the bottom of the drive wer IP5003 Onthe input power cable strip the sheathing back far enough to route individual wires On the motor cable strip the sheathing back far enough to expose the copper wire screen so that the screen can be twisted into a pig tail Keep the short pig tail short to minimize noise radiation the clamps I Strip and connect the power motor wires and the IP5004 power ground wire to the drive terminals Note For R5 frame size the minimum power cable size is 25 mm 4 AWG For R6 frame size refer to Power Terminal Considerations R6 Frame Size on page 217 Connect the pig tail created from the motor cable screen screen into a pig tail tighten clamp s 9 11 analog I O cables at X1 1 Ground only at drive end Connect the ground screen pig tail for RS485 cables at X1 28 or X1 32 Ground only at drive end 8 Strip and connect the individual control wires to the drive terminals See Control Terminals Table on page 17 T IP5005 Installation 22 ACS510 User s Manual Wiring IP 54 Enclosure with Conduit 1
250. olution listing for parameters 51 resonance avoiding select parameter 0 0 0 0 0c 96 revolution counter data parameter 67 rotating arrow control panel 29 RS485 comm a 143 run enable source select parameter 84 run time data parameter 65 67 S safety ci teur ea eae Reed done dosi ie MODE 3 save changes parameter 85 Index 244 scaling actual value FBA ABB drives profile 192 actual value FBA generic profile 194 actual values EFBcomm 150 reference EFB ABB drives profile 171 reference FBA ABB drives profile 189 reference FBA generic profile 193 s curve ramp parameter 94 sensor type parameter 111 serial 1 error fault code 28 153 serial 1 error fault code 198 serial communication See comm serial NUMBER 35 acs ae eee AG eren emus 8 setpoint maximum PID parameter 116 setpoint minimum PID parameter 116 setpoint select PID parameter 115 shock stress testing cece eee 234 short circuit fault code 197 single phase supply connection sells 13 sleep selection PID parameter 118 slip compensation ratio parameter 98 SO UKOV iu ath aaa paa dune eae et haat fug 28 soft keys control
251. on Note 1 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC Manual 0 10 V gt 0 50 Hz D 5 AI2 Actual signal PID 4 20 mA PID PFC 0 10 V gt 0 10096 H 4 6 AGND Analog input circuit common PID setpoint D 7 AO1 Output frequency 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Actual 1 PI controller actual value 0 4 20 mA t719 AGND Analog output circuit common 4110124 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common Ed 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 413 DI Start Stop Manual Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive F 15 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 selection Activation selects PID control I 16 DI4 Interlock Deactivation always stops the drive A17 DI5 Interlock Deactivation stops constant speed motor 148 DI6 Start Stop PFC Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A rA Default operation 21 RO1B Running gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A fi Default operation 24 RO2B Fault 1 gt 22 connected to 24 Fault gt 22 connected to 23 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A A Default operation 27 RO3B j Auxiliary motor switched on gt 25 connected to 27 Input signals Output signals Jumper Setting Analog ref and actual Al1 2 Analog output AO1 Frequency Start stop manual PFC DI1 6 Analog output AO2 Actual 1 J1 Runenable DI2
252. on time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE 2204 e See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY MAX S curve RAMP SHAPE 1 FREQ Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1 See B in figure e Shape is defined as a ramp unless additional time is specified here to reach the maximum frequency A longer time provides a softer transition at each end of the slope The shape becomes an s curve B Han Rule of thumb 1 5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the T acceleration ramp time 4 A B 0 0 LINEAR Specifies linear acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 0 1 1000 0 s CURVE Specifies s curve acceleration deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1 A 2202 ACCELERATION TIME B 2204 RAMP SHAPE 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 Sets the acceleration time s for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2 See 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 2206 DECELER TIME 2 Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2 See 2203 DECELER TIME 1 2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 Selects the shape of the acceleration deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2 See 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 2208 EM DEC TIME Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL e Ramp is linear Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 95 Code Description 2209 RAMP INPUT ZERO Defines control for forcing the ramp in
253. or e See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The second auxiliary motor stops if Two auxiliary motors are running ACS510 output frequency drops below the limit 8113 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8113 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D 8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third to the sixth auxiliary motor See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation The third auxiliary motor stops if Three auxiliary motors are running ACS510 output frequency drops below the limit 8114 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit 8114 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Same process for the fouth motor to the sixth motor 8115 AUX MOT START D Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit parameter 8109 8110 or 8111 for this time period before the auxiliary motor starts See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit parameter 8112 8113 or 8114 for this time period before the auxiliary motor stops See 8112 Low FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation Start Up 132 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 8117 NR OF AUX MOT Sets the numb
254. or 2PFC 1st auxiliary motor etc The first autochange shifts the sequence to 2PFC speed regulated motor 3PFC 1st auxiliary motor 1PFC last auxiliary motor Area The next autochange shifts the sequence again and so on Autochange e If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is Allowed PID output inactive motors are interlocked the drive displays an alarm p 8119 Aad 2015 PFC INTERLOCK 7 When ACS510 power supply is switched off the counter preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory When power is restored the Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory e Ifthe PFC relay configuration is changed or if the PFC enable value is changed the rotation is reset See the first r P 8118 ut P 8118 bullet above Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 135 Code Description 8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function When the Interlock function is enabled An interlock is active when its command signal is absent An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present The ACS510 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor s interlock is active the control panel displays an alarm 2015 PFC INTERLOCK Wire each Interlock circuit as follows Wire a contact of the motor s On Off switch to the Interlock circuit the dr
255. or the ACS510 adjustable speed AC drive including IEC ratings NEMA ratings shaded columns Frame size Ratings 380 480 Volt Drives Abbreviated column headers are described in Symbols on page 211 Type Code Pump and Fan Use Frame ACS510 01 bon Py Pn Size see below A kw HP Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 3 3 1 1 1 5 R1 04A1 4 4 1 1 5 2 R1 05A6 4 5 6 2 2 Note 1 R1 07A2 4 7 2 3 3 R1 09A4 4 9 4 4 5 R1 012A 4 11 9 5 5 7 5 R1 017A 4 17 7 5 10 R2 025A 4 25 11 15 R2 031A 4 31 15 20 R3 038A 4 38 18 5 25 R3 045A 4 45 22 30 R4 060A 4 60 30 40 R4 072A 4 72 37 50 R4 096A 4 96 45 75 R5 124A 4 124 55 100 R6 157A 4 157 75 125 R6 180A 4 180 90 150 R6 195A 4 195 110 Note 1 R6 Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 211 Symbols Typical ratings Pump and Fan use lon continuous rms current PN typical motor power in normal use The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC 4 pole motors The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4 pole NEMA motors Sizing The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range To achieve the rated motor power given in the table the rated current of the drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current Also note that The ratings apply for ambient temperature of 40 C 104 F Technical Data 212 ACS510 User s Manu
256. ores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive Code Description 0401 LAST FAULT 0 Clear the fault history on panel NO RECORD n Fault code of the last recorded fault 0402 FAULT TIME 1 The day on which the last fault occurred The number of days after power on 0403 FAULT TIME 2 The time at which the last fault occurred The time since power on less the whole days reported in 0402 in format hh mm ss 0404 SPEED AT FLT The motor speed rpm at the time the last fault occurred 0405 FREQ AT FLT The frequency Hz at the time the last fault occurred 0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT The DC bus voltage V at the time the last fault occurred 0407 CURRENT AT FLT The motor current A at the time the last fault occurred 0408 TORQUE AT FLT The motor torque 96 at the time the last fault occurred 0409 STATUS AT FLT The drive status hex code word at the time the last fault occurred 0410 DI 1 3 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 1 3 at the time the last fault occurred 0411 DI 4 6 AT FLT The status of digital inputs 4 6 at the time the last fault occurred 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code of the second last fault Read only 0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code of the third last fault Read only Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 71 Group 10 Start Stop Dir This group Defines external sources
257. owed automatic resets within a trial period defined the trial time The last is reset only if the by 3102 TRIAL TIME value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit within the trial time the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains Trial time stopped YN Time e Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control x Xx panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL 3102 TRIAL TIME x Automatic reset Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets See 3101 NR OF TRIALS 3103 DELAY TIME Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart If DELAY TIME zero the drive resets immediately 3104 AR OVERCURRENT Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault OVERCURRENT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation AR OVERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables automatic reset Automatically resets the fault DC OVERVOLT after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME and the drive resumes normal operation AR UNDERVOLTAGE Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off 0 DISABLE Disables automatic reset 1 ENABLE Enables
258. p Displays context sensitive information when the button is pressed The information displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the middle area of the display START Starts the drive in local control The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key Display Contrast To adjust display contrast simultaneously press the MENU key and UP or DOWN as appropriate Output Mode Use the Output mode to read information on the drive s status and to operate the drive To reach the Output mode press EXIT until the LCD display shows status information as described below Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 29 Status Information Top The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive e LOC indicates that the drive control is local that is from the control panel REM indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus e indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows Control Panel Display Significance Rotating arrow clockwise or counter Drive is running and at setpoint clockwise Shaft direction is forward gt or reverse Rotating dotted blinking arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present but motor is not running E g start enable is missing Upper right shows the active reference Middle Using paramet
259. panel 28 specifications control connections 228 input power 213 MANS ia ists te Dau eee S RR E 213 motor connections 219 speed at fault history parameter 70 data parameter 2 65 speed constant digital input selection parameter 76 parameter 0 ee 77 parameter group 055 76 stall frequency fault parameter 101 function fault parameter 101 FEGI ON Lo Napala beu EP EP PSU PUE 101 time fault parameter 101 Standards A is hanka ged nau gape eng RE 235 CE marking 00 20 e ee eee 236 EN 0178 xls ALLAN 235 EN 60204 1 22 aaa 235 EN 60529 2 235 EN 61800 3 235 236 IEC 60664 1 2 235 ACS510 User s Manual start aux motor PFC parameters 130 aux motor delay 131 control 23 sche LA Late epe 30 control EFB comm 146 control FBA comm aaa 178 DC magnetizing time parameter 92 delay PFC parameter 139 frequency PFC parameters 130 function parameter 92 inhibit parameter 00005 92 parameter group l l 92 select enable source parameter 86 torque boost current parameter 93 start mode automatic 92 automatic torque boost
260. panel reference to the current external reference The drive stops Release the button when LOCAL KEEP RUN is displayed to copy the current run stop status and the reference from the user I O To switch back to remote control REM press and hold the button until REMOTE CONTROL is displayed Start Stop To start and stop the drive press the START and STOP buttons Shaft direction To change the shaft direction press DIR parameter 1003 must be set to 3 REQUEST Reference To modify the reference only possible if the display in the upper right corner is highlighted press the UP or DOWN buttons the reference changes immediately The reference can be modified when in local control LOC and can be parameterized using Group 11 Reference Select to also allow modification when in remote control REM Note The Start Stop Shaft direction and Reference functions are only valid in local control LOC mode Other Modes Besides the Output mode the Assistant Control Panel has Other operating modes that are available through the main menu Afault mode that is triggered by faults The fault mode includes a diagnostic assistant mode An alarm mode that is triggered by drive alarms Access to Main Menu and the Other Modes To reach the main menu 1 Press EXIT as necessary to step back through the menus or lists associated with a particular mode Continue until you are back to the Output mode 2 Pres
261. parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012 5319 EFB PAR 19 Holds a copy in hex of the CONTROL WORD Modbus register 40001 5320 EFB PAR 20 Holds a copy in hex of the STATUS WORD Modbus register 40004 Except where restricted by the drive all parameters are available for both reading and writing The parameter writes are verified for the correct value and for a valid register addresses Note Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i e modified values are not automatically stored to permanent memory Use parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to save all altered values The ACS510 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers Function Code Description 03 Read holding 4xxxx registers 06 Preset single 4xxxx register 16 0x10 Hex Preset multiple 4xxxx registers 23 0x17 Hex Read write 4xxxx registers Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual Actual Values 161 The contents of the register addresses 40005 40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are Specified using parameters 5310 5317 e Read only values containing information on the operation of the drive 16 bit words containing a sign bit and a 15 bit integer When negative values written as the two s complement of the corresponding positive value Scaled as described earlier in Actual Value Scaling Exception Codes Exception codes are serial communication responses
262. put mode Handling Inexact Downloads In some situations an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target drive Some examples A download to an old drive specifies parameters values that are not available on the old drive A download from an old drive to a new drive does not have definitions for the new parameters parameters that did not originally exist A download can include an illegal value for the target drive e g a backup from a small drive can have a switching frequency of 12 kHz whereas a big drive can only handle 8 kHz As a default the control panel handles these situations by Discarding parameters values not available on the target drive LOC G DIFFERENCES Using parameter default values when the VALUES OVER MAX 2 download provides no values or invalid values INVALID VALUES 1 Providing a Differences List A listing of the EXTRA PARS 5 type and number of items that the target cannot MISSING VALUES accept exactly as specified READY SEL You can either accept the default edits by pressing READY or view and edit each item as follows Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 1 Highlight an item type in the Differences List left screen below and press SEL to see the details for the selected type right screen below Loc G DIFFERENCES Loc G INVALID VAL VALUES UNDER MIN 3 9902 APLIC MACRO VALUES OVER MAX 2 2606 SWITCHING FREQ INVAL
263. put to zero 0 NOT SEL 1 Di1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to zero Activating the digital input forces ramp input to zero Ramp output will ramp to zero according to the currently used ramp time after which it will stay at zero De activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to zero See DI1 above 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to zero De activating the digital input forces ramp input to zero Activating the digital input ramp resumes normal operation 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function generator input to zero See DIT INV above Start Up 96 ACS510 User s Manual Group 25 Critical Speeds This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be avoided due for example to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds Code Description 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL Sets the critical speeds function on or off The critical speed function avoids specific speed ranges 0 OFF Disables the critical speeds function s7 SA AP PANAON 1 ON Enables the critical speeds function 46 Example To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates badly e Determine problem speed
264. quency parameter 98 symmetrically grounded network 216 system controls parameter group 84 T temperature derating 212 Index ACS510 User s Manual terminals control description 17 control specifications 229 location diagram R1 R4 15 location diagram R5 R6 16 termination ccc ees 144 test date parameter 107 thermal fail fault code 198 1001952 moon e AA 9 torque at fault history parameter 70 boost current parameter 93 data parameter 2 4 65 trim mode PID parameter 121 trim scale PID parameter 121 type code duck AA AA 8 U U f ratio parameter 00005 98 underload curve fault parameter 102 fault code 198 function fault parameter 102 time fault parameter 102 undervoltage automatic reset parameter 104 control enable parameter 91 ungrounded network see floating network units PID parameter 114 unpacking drive 2 2 ee 8 unsymmetrically grounded networks 216 user parameter set change control parameter 85 download an ree dk joa ate od aad ba 33 V vibration stress testing aaa 234 volt
265. r 4 mA Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5 or higher e Set parameter 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION to 1 FAULT 4 AI2 JOYST Defines analog input 2 A12 configured for joystick operation as the reference source e See above AI1 JOYST description EXT REF 1 MAX Hysteresis 4 96 of Full Scale Start Up 74 ACS510 User s Manual 5 DI3U 4D R Defines digital inputs as the frequency reference source motor potentiometer control e Digital input DI3 increases the speed the u stands for up Digital input DI4 decreases the speed the D stands for down A Stop command resets the reference to zero the R stands for reset Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal s rate of change 6 DI3U 4D Same as above DI3U 4D R except A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero The reference is stored When the drive restarts the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration rate to the stored reference 7 DI5U 6D Same as above DI3U 4D except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used 8 COMM Defines the fieldbus as the reference source 9 COMM AI1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below 10 comm al1 Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 A11 combination as the reference source See Analog Input Reference Correction below
266. ranges Assume they are found to 23 be 18 23 Hz and 46 52 Hz 18 Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 1 Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 18 Hz Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 23 Hz Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 46 Hz ML f1H f2L f2H Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 52 Hz 18 23 46 52 gt frer Hz 2502 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1 e The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI Units are Hz CRIT SPEED 1 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1 The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO e Units are Hz 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2502 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2 See parameter 2503 2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2502 2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3 See parameter 2503 Start Up ACS5 10 User s Manual Group 26 Motor Control 97 Code Description 2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0 Disables the feature 1 Enables the feature Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy consumption and noise and should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load 2602 FLUX BRAKING Prov
267. re an additional external RFI EMC filter as specified in the table below The RFI EMC filters are separate options and Technical Data 222 ACS510 User s Manual installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution CISPR11 Class A Compliance Radiated and Conducted Emissions Drive Type Switching Frequency Parameter 2606 1 or 4 kHz 2606 1 or 4 8 kHz 2606 8 Max Length Internal Filter Max Length RFI EMC Filter Max Length Internal Filter Max Length RFI EMC Filter ACS510 01 03A3 4 ACS510 01 04A1 4 ACS510 01 07A2 4 ACS510 01 09A4 4 ACS510 01 012A 4 R1 100 m 330 ft Internal Note 1 100 m 330 ft Internal Note 1 ACS510 01 017A 4 ACS510 01 025A 4 R2 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF21 3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF21 3 ACS510 01 031A 4 ACS510 01 038A 4 R3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF31 3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF31 3 ACS510 01 045A 4 ACS510 01 060A 4 ACS510 01 072A 4 R4 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF41 3 30 m 100 ft Internal 100 m 330 ft ACS400 IF41 3 ACS510 01 096A 4 R5 100 m 330 ft Intern
268. resistor cable connection points Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 227 Mandatory Circuit Protection The following setup is essential for safety it interrupts the main supply in fault situations involving chopper shorts Equip the drive with a main contactor Wire the contactor so that it opens if the resistor thermal switch opens an overheated resistor opens the contactor Below is a simple wiring diagram example L1 L2 L3 4 LL off E gt Fuses ll 2 1 3 qd q E r HM NE a O ACS510 L 5 U1 V1 W1 Ps To Thermal switch standard in l ABB resistors Parameter Set up To enable dynamic braking switch off the drive s overvoltage control Set parameter 2005 0 DISABLE Technical Data 228 Control Connections ACS510 User s Manual Control Connection Specifications Control Connection Specifications Analog Inputs and See table heading Hardware Description on page 17 Digital Outputs Outputs Digital Inputs Digital input impedance 1 5 kQ Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V Max contact voltage 30 V DC 250 V AC Max contact current power 6 A 30 V DC 1500 VA 250 V AC Relays e Max continuous current 2 A rms cos 1 1 A rms cos 9 0 4 Minimum load 500 mW 12 V 10 mA Contact material Silver nickel AgN Isolation between relay digital outputs test voltage 2 5 kV rms
269. rive Heat Loss Air Flow ACS510 01 Frame Size W BTU Hr m3 h ft min 03A3 4 R1 40 137 44 26 04A1 4 R1 52 177 44 26 Technical Data 230 ACS510 User s Manual Drive Heat Loss Air Flow ACS510 01 Frame Size W BTU Hr m3 h ft min 05A6 4 R1 73 249 44 26 07A2 4 R1 97 331 44 26 09A4 4 R1 127 433 44 26 012A 4 R1 172 587 44 26 017A 4 R2 202 792 88 52 025A 4 R2 337 1150 88 52 031A 4 R3 457 1560 134 79 038A 4 R3 562 1918 134 79 045A 4 R4 667 2276 280 165 060A 4 R4 907 3096 280 165 072A 4 R4 1120 3820 280 165 096A 4 R5 1440 4915 168 99 124A 4 R6 1940 6621 405 238 157A 4 R6 2310 7884 405 238 180A 4 R6 2810 9590 405 238 195A 4 R6 3050 10416 405 238 Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual 231 Dimensions and Weights The dimensions and mass for the ACS510 depend on the frame size and enclosure type If unsure of frame size first find the Type code on the drive labels Then look up that type code in the Technical Data on page 210 to determine the frame size A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACS510 drives is located in the ACS510 Technical Reference manual Mounting Dimensions W1 Baa See Detail A WE 5 See Detail B s L d Detail A Detail B X0032 IP 21 and IP 54 Dimensions for each Frame Size R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 mm in mm in mm in m
270. rive profile objects The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Status Word The STATUS WORD is a 16 bit word containing status information sent by the drive to the fieldbus controller The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol profile used See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the ABB Drives Profile Technical Data section Reference The contents of each REFERENCE word Can be used as frequency reference Isa 16 bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15 bit integer Negative references indicating reversed rotation direction are indicated by the two s complement of the corresponding positive reference value The use of a second reference REF2 is supported only when a protocol is configured for the ABB Drives profile Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific See the user s manual provided with the FBA module and or the following sections as appropriate ABB Drives Profile Technical Data Generic Profile Technical Data Actual Values Actual Values are 16 bit words containing information on selected operations of the drive Drive Actual Values for example group 01 parameters can be mapped to Input Words using group 51 parameters protocol dependent but typically parameters 5104 5126 Planning Network planning should address the followi
271. rocedures eee eee 7 tools eR Ee D 9 wiring overview 13 insulation Check cs seta cemeterio ANG BAG 18 integration time PID parameter 114 interlocks parameter eie 135 internal setpoint PID parameter 116 IR compensation frequency parameter 97 parameters eee eee 97 voltage parameter 97 IT network see floating network 241 K keypad see control panel keypad reference select parameter 73 kWh counter data parameter 65 L label serial number 8 a c 8 language parameter 63 liability limits 236 limits parameter group 4 91 load package version parameter 107 LOC REM Assistant panel 22055 29 Basic panel ee ee 37 local control ect eae ed ate eA Rug Dale 29 local mode lock parameter 0 0 0 eee 85 lock control panel access IP54 24 drive control at local control panel 85 parameters 000000000 eee eee 84 low frequency PFC parameters 131 lugs for R6 power cables 217 M macros JANINE an GN dao ey Gath eed 43 ABB standard default 42 alternate na en e eee eee 44 hand auto anaana aaaea 46 motor potentiometer 45 parameter default values 50 parameters not changed PEG us dett eeu So
272. rovide data about the FBA module currently installed e g component versions and status The Parameters Description section lists the group 51 parameters Activate Drive Control Functions FBA Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function Define as a fieldbus input any drive data required for control Define as a fieldbus output any control data required by the drive The following sections describe at a general level the configuration required for each control function The last column in each table below is deliberately blank See the user s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry Start Stop Direction Control Using the fieldbus for start stop direction control of the drive requires Drive parameter values set as defined below Fieldbus controller supplied command s in the appropriate location The location is defined by the Protocol Reference which is protocol dependent Drive Parameter Value Description Protocol Reference 1001 ExT1 10 COMM Start Stop controlled by fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext1 selected Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual 179 Drive Parameter Value Description Protocol Reference 1002 ExT2 10 COMM Start Stop by controlled fieldbus with COMMANDS Ext2 selected 1003 DIRECTION 3 REQUEST Direction controlled by fieldbus
273. rrect Proper input wiring line voltage is NOT connected to drive output The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large This fault can be disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT 36 INCOMP The drive cannot use the software SWTYPE Internal Fault The loaded software is not compatible with the drive Call support representative 101 SERF CORRUPT Error internal to the drive Contact your local ABB sales representative and report the error number 102 RESERVED 103 SERF MACRO 104 RESERVED 105 RESERVED 201 DSP T1 Error in the system Contact your local ABB sales representative and report OVERLOAD the error number 202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 204 DSP STACK ERROR 205 RESERVED OBSOLETE 206 OMIO ID ERROR 207 EFB LOAD ERROR Faults that indicate conflicts in the parameter settings are listed below Fault Fault Name In Code Panel Description and Recommended Corrective Action 1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent Check for any of the following 2007 MINIMUM FREQ gt 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range gt 50 1001 PARPFCREFNG Parameter values are inconsistent Check for the following 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative when 8123 PFC ENABLE is active
274. rt Up ACS510 User s Manual 67 Code Description 0139 PROCESS VAR 3 Process variable 3 Defined by parameters in Group 34 Panel Display Process Variables 0140 RUN TIME The drive s accumulated running time in thousands of hours kh 0141 MWH COUNTER The drive s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours Can not be reset 0142 REVOLUTION CNTR The motor s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions 0143 DRIVE ON TIME HI The drive s accumulated power on time in days 0144 DRIVE ON TIME LO The drive s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks 30 ticks 60 seconds 0145 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature in degrees centigrade PTC resistance in Ohms Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up See parameter 3501 0146 0148 NOT USED 0149 OVERRIDE ACTIVED Override mode actived recorder 1 Drive is in override mode Parameter setting or drive control is not possible Please see paramerter group 17 0 Drive is in normal operating mode in override mode Note If override mode actived this ACS510 module is out of warranty Start Up 68 Group 03 FB Actual Signals This group monitors fieldbus communications ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 Read only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1 The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the
275. rt up configures the drive This process sets parameters that define how the drive operates and communicates Depending on the control and communication requirements the start up process may require any or all of the following Application macros can be selected to define common alternate system configurations using the default settings See Application Macros on page 41 Additional refinements can be made using the control panel to manually select and set individual parameters See Complete Parameter Descriptions on page 63 Control Panels Use a control panel to control the ACS510 to read status data and to adjust parameters The ACS510 works with either of two different control panel types Assistant Control Panel This panel described below includes multi mode to display and control the ACS510 Basic control panel This panel described in a later section provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values Assistant Control Panel Features The ACS510 Assistant Control Panel features e Alphanumeric control panel with a LCD display Language selection for the display Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time Copy function Parameters can be copied to the Control Panel memory for later transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system Context sensitive help Start Up 28 Controls Display Overview ACS510 User s Manual The following table summari
276. rve Overhauling Load Avg Braking Power Curve Overhauling Load Avg Braking Power 4 c PG During Deceleration es Time to Zero l Temperature 2x Time The many variables in the last requirement above are most easily dealt with using the following tables First determine your maximum braking time ON ONyax minimum braking time OFF OFF m n and load type deceleration or overhauling load Calculate duty cycle ONmax Duty Cycle 100 duc ONyax OFF in In the appropriate table find the column that best matches your data ONyax lt column specification and Duty Cycle lt column specification Find the row that matches your drive The minimum power rating for deceleration to zero is the value in the selected row column For overhauling loads double the rating in the selected row column or use the Continuous ON column Technical Data 226 380 480 Volt Drives ACS510 User s Manual Resistance Resistor Minimum Continuous Power Rating Deceleration to Zero Rating P Type Code rcont ACS510 P 3 Pro P 39 Preo Continuous ON 01 R Run lt 3SON x10sON lt 30sON lt 60sON_ gt 60sON see below MAX MN 5 27s OFF 50s OFF gt 180 s OFF gt 180 s OFF lt 10 Duty 17 Duty lt 14 Duty 2596 Duty 25 Duty Ohm Ohm Ww W W W Ww Three phase supply voltage 380 480 V 03A3 4 641 120 65
277. rved 7 AI2LOSS Reserved Reserved 8 MOTOVERTEMP Reserved Reserved 9 PANELLOSS DRIVE ID Reserved 10 Reserved CONFIG FILE System error 11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System error 12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System error 13 EXTFLT1 FORCE TRIP System error 14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware error 15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param setting fault 0308 ALARM WORD 1 When an alarm is active the corresponding bit for the active alarm is set in the Alarm Words Each alarm has a dedicated bit allocated within Alarm Words Bits remain set until the whole alarm word is reset Reset by writing zero to the word The control panel displays the word in hex For example all zeros and a 1 in Bit O displays as 0001 All zeros and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000 0309 ALARM WORD 2 See parameter 0308 Bit 0308 ALARM WORD 1 0309 ALARM WORD 2 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved 1 JOVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP 2 UNDERVOLTAGE Reserved 3 DIRLOCK Reserved 4 O0 COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING 5 Al1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING 6 Al2LOSS EMERGENCY STOP 7 PANEL LOSS Reserved 8 DEVICE OVERTEMP Reserved 9 IMOT OVERTEMP Reserved 10 UNDERLOAD Reserved 11 MOTOR STALL Reserved 12 AUTORESET Reserved 13 PFC AUTOCHANGE Reserved 14 PFC INTERLOCK Reserved 15 Reserved Reserved Start Up 70 Group 04 Fault History ACS510 User s Manual This group st
278. s FBA description 185 comm EFB description 162 EBAS Baha quede BNG Dai bA 175 FBA generic profile 193 controls overview Assistant panel 28 controls overview Basic panel 36 cooling all flow uses de LANE ee ex 229 heat loss 229 space requirement 229 correction source PID parameter 122 cover FOMOVE ana 2s AA LEADER ATA Geel ag 11 repldce uses oe hades May a hee 24 critical speeds avoiding high parameters anaana 96 low parameters 96 parameter group 0005 96 select parameter 005 96 current at fault history parameter 70 data parameter 4 65 max limit parameter 91 measurement fault code 198 rating code 1 1 eee eee 9 239 D dc brake time parameter 92 dc bus voltage data parameter 65 dc current ref parameter 92 DC magnetizing time parameter 92 DC overvoltage fault code 196 DC undervoltage fault code 197 deceleration at aux start PFC parameter 140 emergency time parameter 94 parameter group 22200000 94 ramp select parameter 94 ramp shape parameter 94 ramp time PFC parameter
279. s MENU from the Output mode At this point the middle of the display is a listing of the other modes and the top right text says Main menu 3 Press UP DOWN to scroll to the desired mode 4 Press ENTER to enter the mode that is highlighted The following sections describe each of the other modes Parameters Mode Use the Parameters mode to view and edit parameter values 1 Select PARAMETERS in the Main Menu Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 31 2 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter OC gt PAE GROUPS AI group then press SEL 39 START UP DATA l OPERATING DATA B4 FAULT HISTORY 18 START STOP DIR 11 REFERENCE SELECT 3 Press UP DOWN to highlight the appropriate parameter OC PARAMETERS In eceroup KEYPAD REF SEL a KUTIS 11 1182 ERT1 EXT 11 1 ER REF1 SELECT 1 REF1 MIN ERIT EDIT NOTE The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter 4 Press EDIT 5 Press UP DOWN to step to the desired parameter value Note To view the parameter default value In the set mode press UP DOWN simultaneously 6 Press SAVE to store the modified value or press CANCEL to leave the set mode Any modifications not saved are cancelled 7 Press EXIT to return to the listing of parameter groups and again to return to the main menu Start Up 32 ACS510 User s Manual Changed Parameters Mode Use the Changed Parameters mode to view and edit a
280. s are running ACS510 output frequency exceeds the limit 8111 1 Hz Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit 8111 1 Hz for at least the time 8115 AUX MOT START D Same process for the fouth motor to the sixth motor 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor stops if The first auxiliary motor is running alone B Output frequency decrease during the stop delay C Diagram showing auxiliary motor s run status as frequency C decreases 1 On e Grey path Shows hysteresis if time is reversed the path 1 t backwards is not the same For details on the path for starting 0 see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1 Note Low Frequency 1 value must be between e 2007 MINIMUM FREQ 1 e 8109 START FREQ 1 ACS510 output frequency drops below the limit f Hz 4 8112 1 Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit fax 8112 1 Hz for at least the time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D Bas After the first auxiliary motor stops FOE y e Output frequency increases by the value P 8112 A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 LOW FREQ 1 Ly e In effect the output of the speed regulated motor increases to P 8112 1 T compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor fmin See figure where e A 8109 START FREQ 1 8112 Low FREQ 1 P SURSE 8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary mot
281. s when starting new motors See the follow diagram Drive is started and RO1 is closed Modulation is not allowed Start Up ACS510 User s Manual FOut Start ROI Motor1 RO2 Motor2 8109 START START FREQ 1 Motor in RO2 is Speed Req Motor Motor in ROI is Aux Motor 127 8122 PFC START DLY 8122 PFCSTARTDLY 6 T i t e 8122 PFC START DLY Drive waits for PFC Start Delay parameter 8122 Modulation is not allowed because drive has to wait that all contactor are stabilized Modulation is allowed Modulation starts from zero speed After Fout rises over Start Frequency 1 Aux Mot Start Delay starts parameter 8115 When Aux Mot Start Delay elapses then drive coasts to stop and RO1 is opened Drive waits for PFC Start Delay parameter 8122 Meaning of this delay it to wait contactors to stabilize If there is some oscillation in Motor 1 contactors when closing RO2 then contactors might go to wrong state Drive close RO2 This is new plae for Speed Regulated Motor Modulation is not allow yet Drive waits for PFC Start Delay parameter 8122 Modulation is not allowed because the drive has to wait that all contactors are stabilized Drive close RO1 Motor in RO1 is connected directly to the network constant speed and modulation is allowed Drive start accelerating from zero in RO2 Stoping
282. se the INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the feedback signal or drive speed oscillates constantly It may be necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation e Increase INTEGRATION TIME 4002 until the oscillation stops Set INTEGRATION TIME 4002 to 1 15 to 1 5 times the above value e If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise increase the value of Parameter 1303 FILTER Al1 or 1306 FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal Start Up 114 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 4002 INTEGRATION TIME A A Defines the PID Controller s integration time Integration time is by definition is the time required to increase B the output by the error value D P 4001 10 e Error value is constant and 100 Gain 1 C P 4001 1 e Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100 change is achieved in 1 second t 0 0 NOT SEL Disables integration I part of controller pc 0 1 3600 0 Integration time seconds pt P4002 gt See 4001 for adjustment procedure A Error B Error value step C Controller output with Gain 1 D Controller output with Gain 10 4003 DERIVATION TIME iror d Process Error Value Defines the PID Controller s derivation time You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller 100 output The derivative is the error value s rate of change For example if the process error value changes line
283. shipping label to verify that all parts have been received Drive Identification Drive Labels To determine the type of drive you are installing refer to either Serial number label attached on upper part of the chokeplate between the mounting holes ACS510 01 09A4 4 N688 vr 9880 480 V TMNT Bt tie Ser no 3050700001 N Type code label attached on the heat sink on the right side of the unit cover Input U4 3 380 480 V Lin 9 4 A f 48 63 Hz C Output U 3 0 U V bw OA JULIAN LL Motor Py 4 kW ACS510 01 09A4 4 N688 Installation ACS510 User s Manual 9 Type Code Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label ACS510 01 09A4 4 AC Standard Drive 510 product series NEN Construction region specific 01 Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance Output current rating See Ratings chart for details Voltage rating 4 380 480 VAC Degree of protection Enclosure and or other options No specification IP 21 B055 IP 54 N688 GO mark approval with 50Hz limit N689 GO mark approval with 55Hz limit Ratings and Frame Size The chart in Ratings on page 210 lists technical specifications and identifies the drive s frame size significant since some instructions in this document vary depending on the drive s frame size To read the Ratings table you need the Output current rating entry from
284. signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal Bit 3 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 2 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal 2 6 DI2 INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 2 signal e See DI INV above 1610 DISPLAY ALARMS Controls the visibility of the following alarms 2001 Overcurrent alarm e 2002 Overvoltage alarm e 2003 Undervoltage alarm e 2009 Device overtemperature alarm 0 NO The above alarms are suppressed 1 YES All of the above alarms are enabled Start Up 88 ACS510 User s Manual Group 17 Override This group defines the source for the override activation signal the override speed frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled Warning When override DI is activated the normal control of the drive using the panel or I O interface is not possible See the explanation below Ensure this will not cause any danger in the application note also that the drive is out of the factory warranty when it is in the overide mode When override DI is activated the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset speed or frequency When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots When overri
285. st operating P2616 frequencies E nen eee 3 FREELY DEFINED Freely defined by parameter USER U3 2610 2618 See figure P2612 USER U2 P2610 USER U1 P2603 f Hz IP COMP L gt P2611 P2613 P2615 P2617 P9907 USERF1 F2 F3 F4 MOTOR NOM FREQ 2606 SWITCHING FREQ Sets the switching frequency for the drive Also see parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL and Switching Frequency Derating on page 212 e Higher switching frequencies mean less noise e The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only on frame sizes R1 R6 2607 SW FREQ CTRL The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACS510 internal temperature rises above a limit See Figure This function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise 0 OFF The function is disabled 1 ON The switching frequency is limited according to the figure Limit R1 R6 Drives 8 kHzf 2 ACS510 i Temperature gt 80 C 90 C 100 C 2608 SLIP COMP RATIO Sets gain for slip compensation in 96 A squirrel cage motor slips under load Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for the slip 0 No slip compensation 1 200 Increasing slip compensation 100 means full slip compensation 2609 NOISE SMOOTHING This parameter introduces a random component to th
286. store a drive or to transfer parameters to systems that are identical to the original system Start Up 40 ACS510 User s Manual dL P Download Partial Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel to a drive The partial set does not include internal motor parameters parameters 9905 9909 1605 1607 5201 nor any Group 51 and Group 53 parameters Use this option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations the drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same e dL u1 Download User Set 1 Copies USER s1 parameters user sets are saved using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO from the Control Panel to the drive dl u2 Download User Set 2 Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the drive 1 Starting from the Output mode press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following alternate modes reF Reference PAr Parameter e CoPY Copy 2 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step through to the CoPY Copy Mode 3 Press MENU ENTER The display shows one of the following copy options uL Upload rE A Restore All dL P Download Partial 4 Use UP or DOWN arrow key to step to the desired option 5 Press MENU ENTER The parameter set is transferred as directed During the transfer the display shows the transfer status as a percent of completion 6 Press EXIT RESET to step back to the Output mode Handling Inexact Downloads In some situations a
287. stors at both ends of the network Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect the termination resistors See following diagram and table Terminated Terminated Station Station Station Station X1 Identification Hardware Description 28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface 29 B Positive 28 SCR J2 J2 SCR 791 B 30 A Negative ieu e A E 30 A A ON 31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON 32 SCR 32 Screen SCR OFF position ON position H Bus termination GND Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive On one end connect the shield to terminal 28 and on the other end connect to terminal 32 Do not connect the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals as that would make the shielding continuous For configuration information see the following Communication Set up EFB below Activate Drive Control Functions EFB on page 146 The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data For example Modbus Protocol Technical Data on page 154 Communication Set up EFB Serial Communication Selection To activate the serial communication set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL 1 STD MODBUS Note If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel your drive does not have that protocol software in the application memory
288. t appearing Replacement fans are available from ABB Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts Frame Sizes R1 R4 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove drive cover 3 For Frame Size R1 R2 Press together the retaining clips on the fan cover sides and lift R3 R4 Press in on the lever located on the left side of the fan mount and rotate the fan up and out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power Frame Sizes R5 and R6 Bottom View R5 To replace the fan 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the screws attaching the fan 3 Remove the fan R5 Swing the fan out on its hinges Bottom View R6 R6 Pull the fan out 4 Disconnect the fan cable 9 5 Install the fan in reverse order 6 Restore power X0022 Maintenance 208 ACS510 User s Manual Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement IP 54 enclosures have an additional internal fan to circulate air inside the enclosure Frame Sizes R1 R4 To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R4 1 Remove power from drive 2 Remove the front cover 3 The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed retaining clips at each corner Press all four clips toward the center to release the barbs 5 Disconnect the fan cable 6 Install the fan in reverse order noting that
289. t ref sel activate 179 installation llle 177 OVerVieW llle 174 PID control setpoint source activate 181 planning eke eee eae ee 176 protocol listing 0 eee ee 174 references ioo HAV nla d were 176 relay output control activate 180 CI C 178 start stop control activate 178 state diagram ABB drives 188 status word 2 0 0 cece eee ee 176 status word ABB drives 186 conduit It eo eet tede Gen aoa Le Ir 13 config file CPI firmware revision parameter 123 id revision parameter 123 revision parameter 123 connections COMOL s 2 dade ce bbb Pe P pA UR 17 diagram oren EEE E a EEE eee 17 EFB GCOmtm 3 2o seh bord 143 FBA module 00 2 eee eee 177 po vem 17 constant speed see speed constant construction code 0 00 eee ee eee 9 contamination levels environment limit 234 shipping limit 234 contrast control panel 28 control connection specifications 228 location data parameter 65 reference Assistant panel 30 shaft direction 020005 30 start stop 00002 ee eee 30 terminal specifications 229 control cable connections 0 cece eee ee 17 requirements
290. tatus information as described below Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 37 Status Information When the Basic Control Panel is in the Output mode the display Top left shows the control location REM A LOC indicates that the drive control is local that 1 1 is from the control panel T Em REM indicates that the drive control is remote such as the basic I O X1 or fieldbus The center of the display provides one Group 01 parameter value at a time and makes up to three parameter values available press UP or DOWN to scroll through available parameters By default the display can scroll through three parameters 0103 OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0104 CURRENT and 0105 TORQUE To change the defaults use parameters 3401 3408 and 3415 to select the parameters from Group 01 in the scroll list Enter value 0100 to disable any of the three items in the scroll list For example if 3401 0100 and 3415 0100 then scrolling is disabled and only the parameter specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display You can also scale each item in the scroll list for example to convert motor speed to a display of conveyor speed Parameters 3402 3405 scale the parameter specified by 3401 parameters 3409 3412 scale the parameter specified by 3408 etc Top right shows the units for the parameter value Bottom left shows OUTPUT Bottom right shows the motor direction of rotation Text display
291. tatus Word The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information sent by the drive to the master station Embedded Fieldbus 166 ABB Drives Profile The following table and the state diagram later in this sub section describe the STATUS WORD content for the ABB Drives profile ACS510 User s Manual ABB Drives Profile EFB STATUS WORD See Parameter 5320 Name Value Description Correspond to states boxes in the state diagram RDY_ON RDY_RUN READY TO SWITCH ON NOT READY TO SWITCH ON READY TO OPERATE OFF1 ACTIVE RDY_REF OPERATION ENABLED OPERATION INHIBITED TRIPPED FAULT No fault OFF_2 STA OFF2 INACTIVE OFF2 ACTIVE OFF_3 STA OFF3 INACTIVE OFF3 ACTIVE SWC_ON_INHIB ALARM AT_SETPOINT SWITCH ON INHIBIT ACTIVE SWITCH ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE Warning alarm See Alarm Listing in the Diagnostics section for details on alarms No warning alarm OPERATING Actual value equals within tolerance limits the reference value Actual value is outside tolerance limits not equal to reference value 10 REMOTE ABOVE_LIMIT Drive control location REMOTE EXT1 or EXT2 Drive control location LOCAL Supervised parameter s value gt supervision high limit Bit remains 1 until supervised parameter s value lt supervision low limit See group 32 Supervision Supervised parameter
292. ted by defining the minimum and maximum values of the source parameter or content Defining an maximum value parameter 1503 or 1509 that is less than the content minimum value parameter 1502 or 1508 results in an inverted output Filtered Code Description 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL Defines the content for analog output AO1 99 EXCITE PTC Provides a current source for sensor type PTC Output 1 6 mA See Group 35 100 EXCITE PT100 Provides a current source for sensor type Pt100 Output 9 1 mA See Group 35 101 145 Output corresponds to a parameter in the Operating Data group Group 01 Parameter defined by value value 102 parameter 0102 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN AAO mA Sets the minimum content value P1505 1 Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1511 l e Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output i These parameters content and current min and max settings provide scale and offset adjustment for the output See figure l 1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX P 1504 Sets the maximum content value p 15 19 pa CONTENT e Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501 P 1502 1508 i e Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will AO mA P 1503 1509 be converted to an analog output P 1505 an 1504 MINIMUM AO1 P 1511 l Sets the minimum output current i 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 I Sets the maximum output current 1506 FILTER AO1 l P 1504
293. ted in this channel 29 REQ REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel 0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel 30 ACK STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted 0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted 31 ACK OFF ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button 0 Normal operation Embedded Fieldbus ACS510 User s Manual State Diagram ABB Drives Profile To illustrate the operation of the state diagram the following example ABB DRV LIM implementation of the ABB Drives profile uses the control word to start the drive 169 First the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met See above When the power is first connected the state of the drive is not ready to switch on See dotted lined path in the state diagram below Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the OPERATING state is reached meaning that the drive is running and follows the given reference See table below Step CONTROL WORD Value Description 1 CW 0000 0000 0000 0110 bit 15 bit 0 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH ON Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding CW 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE 4 CW 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED The drive starts but will not accelerate 5 CW 0000 0000
294. ter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 When both auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 parameter 8104 reference step 2 When three auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 e When four auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 2 X parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 When five auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 3 X parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 When six auxiliary pumps operate increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 parameter 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 4 X parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference e Applies only when at least two auxiliary constant speed motors are running e See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference Applies only when at least three auxiliary constant speed motors are running See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1 8109 START FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor The first auxiliary motor starts if No auxiliary motors are running ACS510 output frequency exceeds the limit
295. ters 1401 1403 and 1410 1412 where the settings are either 31 PFC or X anything but 31 and where the Autochange function is enabled 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV value gt 0 Parameter Setting ACS510 Relay Assignment 2 EAE SEE T118 Autochange Disabled 4 4 44 44 1 ROI RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6 0 001 111 18 E29 E53 EON TN E23 E77 3131 XIX XX 1 PFC PFC X X X X 31 31 31 X X X 2 IPFC PFC PFC X X X X 31 31 X X X 1 X PFC PFC X X X 31 31 31 31 31 31 5 PFC PFC PFC PFC PFC PFC 31 31 X X X X O PFC PFC X X X X No auxiliary motors but the autochange function is in use Working as a standard PID control 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the Relay Logic interval between changes m The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when the speed regulated motor is running See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the Autochange function ag The drive always coasts to a stop when autochange is performed Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS J value gt 0 0 0 NOT SEL Disables the Autochange function 0 1 336 The operating time interval the time when the start signal is on bolwaen omale Be changes I Warning When enabled the Autochange function requires z the interlocks 8120 interlocks value gt 0 enabled During B autochange the interlocks interrupt the drive s power output preventing
296. through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 2 NOT SAVED parameters altered from the control panel are not saved To save you must use this parameter If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK 1 OPEN parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to permanent memory 0 DONE Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved 1 SAVE Saves altered parameters to permanent memory Start Up 86 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 1608 START ENABLE 1 Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal Note Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality 0 NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal If the voltage drops and de activates this digital input the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on the panel display The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes 2 6 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the start enable 1 signal See DI1 above 7 COMM Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal Bit 2 of the Command word 2 parameter 0302 activates the start disable 1 signal See fieldbus user s manual for detailed instructions
297. tic Displays itu thet nece e dioe eiue al EOS eae lea BS 195 Correcting Faults rirerire rni EnA ae Mae ee aute eed ING dA e o TAa 196 Correcting Alarms 3 cane de iE TEES EDAX REG ETAGERERIEPERIDESES 201 Table of Contents ACS510 User s Manual Maintenance Maintenance Intervals 0c cece ete eee 206 Heatsink cos ate Nee exo a hee Pata Six dto eat Sa e ete 206 Main Fan Replacement 000 cece tee ees 207 Internal Enclosure Fan Replacement 2200000000055 208 Cap acilOrsig 4 ate sae na pr ME 208 ControhiPanel esr et eR er acere abate wt ties pe ees 209 Technical Data Ratings nds d ie teint iai s EBA bua ig d dn aan ad YNANG eed s Are 210 Input Power Connections 0c eee 213 Motor Connections acude es Dept TR IN APA P Ray ds 219 Brake Components 000 cece eect es 224 Control Connections s cete rieni i ia e B e EE eee 228 EFICIENCY a za et i Ne Sere Lote on wrens a PA RS hehe PA 229 ee auae a ihe og ke has E eee ace a asta Re Nue MN tre ghee at AS 229 Dimensions and Weights a eee 231 Degrees of Protection Xa eue Pe ween DEAE OEE EEA RE 233 Ambient Gonditions oves Dur ake cee bo esate oa ca cane f 234 Materials sre RR e ME Yd er e EY CEDENS wha eid a ER 235 Applicable Standards ear ted Oe Ka Pale eae REA qa 235 Liability Limits o rep E EGER eR KATANA KA CREER a Y D 236 Index Table of Contents ACS510 User s Manual Installation Study these
298. tion 1 DI1 Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function Activating the digital input activates the sleep function De activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 7 DI2 DI6 Defines digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 above 7 INTERNAL Defines the output frequency process reference and process actual value as the control for the PID sleep function Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 1 DI1 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function De activating the digital input activates the sleep function Activating the digital input restores PID control 2 6 DIZ INV DI6 INV Defines an inverted digital input DI2 DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function See DI1 INV above 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL Sets the motor speed frequency that enables the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below this level for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive Requires 4022 7 INTERNAL See figure A PID output level B PID process feedback 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function a motor speed frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least this time period enables the PID sleep function stopping the drive See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL
299. tion Coefficient 200 17 miei l l 100 7 FFEN l i AI1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1105 096 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 100 0 5 Par 1108 100 Al1 Input Signal 100 0 5 par 1108 gt 0 50 100 REF2 COMM AI1 COMM Al 0 5 REF2 MAX Fieldbus Reference A Correction Coefficient 200 J gt 77 77775 100 Jf 4 l Al1 Input Signal 0 a 0 50 100 Fieldbus Adapter ACS510 User s Manual Reference Handling 191 Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control location EXT1 and EXT2 The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values REF1 and REF2 Note fieldbus references are bipolar that is they can be positive or negative ABB Drives Profile Parameter Value Setting Al Reference Scaling 1003 DIRECTION 1 FORWARD Max Ref Fieldbus Resultant Ref Reference 163 100 100 163 1003 DIRECTION 1003 DIRECTION 2 REVERSE 3 REQUEST Fieldbus 163 100 Resultant Ref 100 163 Reference i l l l l l l l Max Ref Max Ref Fieldbus Resultant Ref 163 100 Reference Max Ref
300. tion lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS Parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE SELECT if drive operation is REM Diagnostics ACS510 User s Manual 203 Alarm rs Code Display Description 2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault OVERTEMP may be near R1 R4 amp R7 R8 100 C 212 F R5 R6 110 C 230 F Check for and correct Fan failure Obstructions in the air flow Dirtor dust coating on the heat sink Excessive ambient temperature Excessive motor load 2010 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is hot based on either the drive s estimate or on temperature feedback This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check Check for overloaded motor Adjust the parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be near Check Motor and drive ratings match motor is NOT undersized for the drive Settings on parameters 3013 to 3015 2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region This alarm warns that a Motor Stall fault trip may be near 2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault note 1 reset which may start the motor To control automatic reset use
301. tive Note Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so called fault speed which may be activated if the control signal is lost For example see parameters 3001 AISMIN FUNCTION 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC Code Description 1201 CONST SPEED SEL Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds See general comments in introduction 0 NOT SEL Disables the constant speed function 1 Di1 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input D11 Digital input activated Constant Speed 1 activated 2 6 DI2 DI6 Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2 DI6 See above 7 DI1 2 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI1 and DI2 e Uses two digital inputs as defined below O DI de activated 1 DI activated DI DIZ Function 0 0 No constant speed 1 0 Constant speed 1 1202 0 1 Constant speed 2 1203 1 1 Constant speed 3 1204 Can be set up as a so called fault speed which is activated if the control signal is lost Refer to parameter 3001 AI lt MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR 8 DI2 3 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI2 and DI3 See above D11 2 for code 9 D13 4 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI3 and D14 e See above D11 2 for code 10 DI4 5 Selects one of three Constant Speeds 1 3 using DI4 and Di5 e See above D11 2 for code 11 DI5 6 Selects one
302. tive Check for and correct Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply Insufficient deceleration time parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2 2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Under voltage controller is active Check for and correct Undervoltage on mains 2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed Either Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation or Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change if reverse operation is safe 2005 I O COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out Check for and correct Fault setup 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME Communication settings Group 51 or 53 as appropriate Poor connections and or noise on line 2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3021 Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost or value is less than the minimum setting Check nput source and connections Parameter that sets the minimum 3022 Parameter that sets the Alarm Fault operation 3001 2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communica
303. tor shield Shield Shield sae and Shield ePE Shield Not allowed for motor cables CE A four conductor system three phase conductors and a protective conductor without a shield Allowed for motor cables with phase P conductor cross section up to 10 mm AO Effective Motor Cable Screens The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is the better and tighter the cable s screen the lower the radiated emission level The following figure shows an example of an effective construction for example lflex Servo FD 780 CP Lappkabel or MCCMK NK Cables Insulation Jacket Inner Insulator L2 AN Braided Metallic Screen L3 EN 61800 3 Compliant Motor Cables To comply with EN 61800 3 requirements Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in Effective Motor Cable Screens on page 221 Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle the bundle length must be less than five times its width and connected it to the terminal marked at the bottom right hand corner of the drive Motor cables must be grounded at the motor end with an EMC cable gland The ground must contact the cable screen all the way around the cable For EN 61800 3 First Environment Restricted Distribution CISPR11 Class A and EN 61800 3 Second Environment compliance the drive includes an internal filter that provides compliance for at least 30 m 100 ft motor cable lengths For some drives longer cable lengths requi
304. trol Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control Word 5320 EFB PAR 20 ABB Drives profile ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL Status Word Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status Word Start Up 126 ACS510 User s Manual Group 81 PFC Control This group defines a Pump Fan Control PFC mode of operation The major features of PFC control are The ACS510 controls the motor of pump no 1 varying the motor speed to control the pump capacity This motor is the speed regulated motor Direct line connections power the motor of pump no 2 and pump no 3 pump no 6 etc pump 4 5 6 need RO extension module OREL 01 The ACS510 switches pump no 2 and then pump no 3 pump no 6 etc on and off as needed These motors are auxiliary motors The ACS510 PID control uses two signals a process reference and an actual value feedback The PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference When demand defined by the process reference exceeds the first motor s capacity user defined as a frequency limit the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary pump The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary pump s addition to total output Then as before the PID controller adjusts the speed frequency of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference If demand continues to increase PFC adds additio
305. ture feedback Check for overloaded motor Adjustthe parameters used for the estimate 3005 3009 Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either Drive is in local control mode the control panel displays LOC or Drive is in remote control mode REM and is parameterized to accept start stop direction or reference from the control panel To correct check Communication lines and connections Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR Parameters in Group 10 Command Inputs and Group 11 Reference Select if drive operation is REM 11 REVERSED Not used 12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall Motor is operating in the stall region Check for and correct Excessive load Insufficient motor power Parameters 3010 3012 13 14 RESERVED EXTERNAL FLT 1 Not used Digital input defined to report first external fault is active See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active See parameter 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 Diagnostics 198 ACS510 User s Manual Fault Fault Name In Description and Recommended Corrective Action Code Panel 16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables The drive monitors for ground faults while the drive is r
306. uildings used for domestic purposes Liability Limits The manufacturer is not responsible for Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation commissioning repair alteration or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant documentation Units subjected to misuse negligence or accident Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser In no event shall the manufacturer its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for special indirect incidental or consequential damages losses or penalties If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive please contact the local distributor or ABB office The technical data information and specifications are valid at the time of printing The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without prior notice Technical Data ACS510 User s Manual Index Numerics Oxxxx register EFB function codes 157 EFB mapping anaana aaa 155 1xxxx register EFB function codes 158 EFB mapping 157 3 wire macro a so anaana 2c eee 43 3xxxx register EFB function codes 158 EFB mapping 158 Axxxx register EFB function codes 160 EFB mapping anaana 158 A ABB standard default macro 42 acceleration deceleration
307. unning and while the drive is not running Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and can produce false positives Possible corrections Check for correct faults in the input wiring Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length Adelta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non running tests To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not running use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT To disable response to all ground fault monitoring use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT 17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected Check for and correct Disconnected load Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 18 THERM FAIL Internal fault The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the drive is open or shorted Contact your local ABB sales representative 19 OPEX LINK Internal fault A communication related problem has been detected on the fiber optic link between the OITF and OINT boards Contact your local ABB sales representative 20 OPEX PWR Internal fault Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply Contact your local ABB sales representative 21 CURR MEAS Internal fault Current measurement is out of range Contact your local ABB sales representative 22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high Check for and correct Missing mains phase Blown fuse 23 If th
308. urned under controlled circumstances according to local regulations Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks If recycling is not feasible all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed circuit boards can be landfilled The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the printed circuit boards contain lead both of which will be classified as hazardous waste within the EU They must be removed and handled according to local regulations For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling instructions please contact your local ABB distributor Applicable Standards Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standards marks on the type code label Mark Applicable Standards EN 50178 1997 Electronic equipment for use in power installations C EN 60204 1 1997 Safety of machinery Electrical equipment of machines Part 1 corrigendum Sep 1998 General requirements Provisions for compliance The final assembler of the machine is responsible for installing An emergency stop device Asupply disconnecting device EN 60529 1991 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures IP code corrigendum May 1993 amendment A1 2000 EN 61800 3 1996 EMC product standard including specific test methods Amendment A11 2000 Compliance is valid with the following provisions The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in
309. ust remain in the default setting O OFF Connection example x1 1 SCR Signal cable shield screen 1 2 AI External reference 1 0 10 V Hand Control i 3 AGND Analog input circuit common 4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC D gt 5 Al2 External reference 2 0 20 mA Auto Control 6 AGND Analog input circuit common DH H7 lAO1 Motor output speed 0 20 mA D 8 AO2 Output current 0 20 mA j H9 AGND Analog output circuit common 10 24 V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC 11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common 12 DCOM Digital input common for all 13 DI1 Start Stop Hand Activation starts the drive 14 DI2 Forward Reverse Hand Activation reverses rotation direction r 115 DI3 EXT1 EXT2 Selection Activation selects auto control 16 DI4 Run enable Deactivation always stops the drive 17 DI5 Forward Reverse Auto Activation reverses rotation direction 18 DI6 Start Stop Auto Activation starts the drive 19 RO1C Relay output 1 programmable 20 RO1A A Default operation 21lRO1B Ready gt 19 connected to 21 22 RO2C Relay output 2 programmable 23 RO2A M Default operation 24 RO2B Running gt 22 connected to 24 25 RO3C Relay output 3 programmable 26 RO3A Ax Default operation 27 RO3B Fault 1 gt 25 connected to 27 F
310. vercurrent alarm or fault occurs 22 OVERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs 23 DRIVE TEMP Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 24 UNDERVOLTAGE Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs 25 Al1 LOSS Energize relay when Al1 signal is lost 26 AI2 LOSS Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost 27 MOTOR TEMP Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs 28 STALL Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists 29 UNDERLOAD Energize relay when an underload alarm or fault occurs 30 PID SLEEP Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active 31 PFC Use relay to start stop motor in PFC control See Group 81 PFC Control Use this option only when PFC control is used Selection activated deactivated when drive is not running 32 AUTOCHANGE Energize relay when PFC autochange operation is performed Use this option only when PFC control is used 33 FLUX READY Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque motor has reached nominal magnetizing 34 USER 82 Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active Start Up 80 ACS510 User s Manual Code Description 35 COMM Energize relay based on input
311. w shows alternate thermistor connections At the motor end the cable shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor If this is not possible leave the shield unconnected Thermistor Relay Thermistor 0 or 1 Thermistor 0 Thermistor relay OMIO board y OMIO board DI6 24 VDC i DI6 HI __ 24 VDC Start Up ACS510 User s Manual 111 For other faults or for anticipating motor overheating using a model see Group 30 Fault Functions Code Description 3501 3502 SENSOR TYPE Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used PT100 C or PTC ohms See parameters 1501 and 1507 0 NONE 1 1 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor Analog output A01 or A02 feeds constant current through the sensor The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises as does the voltage over the sensor The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or Al2 and converts it to degrees centigrade 2 2 x PT100 Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 3 3x PT100 Sensor configuration uses three PT 100 sensors Ohm Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100 4000 4 PTC Sensor configuration uses PTC The analog output feeds a constant current through
312. y number displayed on the control panel Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel is in P 0137 the control mode Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected P 0138 Using the following parameters the display value can be scaled converted to convenient units and or displayed as a bar graph P 0139 The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group 100 not selected First parameter not displayed 101 199 Displays parameter 0101 0199 If parameter does not exist the display shows n a 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Display Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter Value Use parameters 3402 3403 3406 and 3407 for example to convert a Group 01 parameter such as 0102 SPEED in rpm to the speed of a P 3407 conveyor driven by the motor in ft min For such a conversion the source values in the figure are the min and max motor speed and the display values are the corresponding min and max conveyor speed Use parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display P3406 Note Selecting units does not convert values i 3403 SIGNAL1 MAX P3402 P 3403 Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter Source Value 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM l l l 3404 Value Display Range Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter 0 3 32768 32767 1 7 Defines the decimal point location Enter the number of di
313. y parameter 70 voltage at history parameter 70 words data parameters 69 fault code 28 serial 1 err 005s 153 fault logging Assistant panel 32 FB actual signals parameter group 68 feedback multiplier PID parameter 116 feedback select PID parameter 116 field weakening point 219 fieldbus see comm command words data parameters 68 CPI firmware revision parameter 123 parameter refresh parameter 123 parameters ee lees 123 status words data parameters 68 status parameter 123 type parameter 00005 123 fieldbus adapter see comm FBA firmware test date parameter 107 firmware version parameter 107 first environment definition 236 floating network connections naaa 216 warning about filters 222 223 warning about screws at EM1 EM3 15 warning about screws at F1 F2 16 flux braking parameter 97 flux optimization parameter 97 force trip fault code 198 ThaMe SIZE6 seed eh BANAL DAA eed LA 210 free fall stress testing eae 234 frequency at fault history parameter 70 max limit parameter 91 min limit parameter
314. zes the button functions and displays on the Assistant Control Panel Status LED Green for normal operation If LED is flashing or red see Diagnostics LCD Display Divided into three main areas Top line variable depending on the mode of operation For example see Status Information on page 29 Middle area variable in general shows parameter values menus or lists Bottom line shows current function of the two soft keys Soft key 1 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower left corner of the LCD display Up Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the middle of the LCD Display Increments a value if a parameter is selected Increments the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted in reverse video LOC REM Changes between local and remote control of the drive STOP Stops the drive in local control General Display Features Soft Key Functions Soft key 2 Function varies and is defined by the text in the lower right corner of the LCD display Down Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the middle of the LCD Display Decrements a value if a parameter is selected Decrements the reference if the upper right corner is highlighted in reverse video Hel

Installation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents